Home

VARISPEED E7 USER'S MANUAL

1. Drive Mode LJ Frequency reference 22 display unit 01 03 C mre one enon E GOU ug NENNEN e e e ESC ESC DAME QUCK ADV VERY ATUNE 2 i Output nnn LI LI ESC x Output current ane LI LI LI A ESC z Monitor setting for 01 01 LI LI Li ESC z Status Monitor gt Frequency reference 11 C f 1 L Li LF 2 ESC y Fan operating time u i 40k ESC w 3 j e eee o DRIVE QUCK ADV VERY ORVE QUCK ADV VERPY Fig 3 4 Operations in Drive Mode ad P P The first monitor parameter frequency reference will be displayed when power is turned ON The mon itor item displayed at startup can be set in o1 02 Monitor Selection after Power Up IMPORTANT 8 Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display Quick Programming Mode In quick programming mode the parameters required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set Parameters can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys to change the frequency The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting Refer to Chapter 5 User Parameters for details on the parameters displayed in quick programming mode iExample Oper
2. 5 4 User Parameter Tables cc cesseeeeeenseeeeeeeaaeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeceeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 10 Seti Saindss sce eee iE dd erdt die 5 10 4 Application Parameters 6 onore tote ES oe ete als 5 12 Tuning Parameters Go 2 cecal ants etal cale eid 5 18 Reference Parameters d tentent 5 21 Motor Parameters E o ac Ui 5 23 Option Parameters Poco ectetuer ee ck su ONU EUN Dt IC E 5 25 gt Terminal Function Parameters H ite esci ote ette eb pte 5 26 Protection Function Parameters L ccccccccccceseccsescscseesecescsescececeececetecesescstscnestsvscateseees 5 32 N Special AdjUushrfs o ets ct he ets te esent decima ie ot 5 38 Digital Operator Parameters o ntes 5 39 Te Motor Autotuning atcp d duco Le E tA de 5 42 U Monitor Parameters eite estat tae ts 5 43 Setting Values that Change with the V f Pattern Selection E1 03 5 48 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 5 49 Parameter Settings by Function 6 1 Carrier Frequency Selection eeeesse eene nennen 6 2 Setting the Carrier Frequency cccccccscsecssseccsessssescesescosescosescouescesescenesesnesecneseeenees 6 2 Frequency Reference c e eodd
3. 6 58 Switching Operation Source to MEMOBUS 6 58 AUTO HAND Mode Switching by Digital Input 6 59 Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands FJOG RJOG 6 59 Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors External Error Function 6 60 Output Terminal Functions ssssss MR 6 61 Monitor Parameters 6 64 Using the Analog Monitor Parameters ssssssssseeeteteneeees 6 64 Individual EUrictiong eret tenter eeepc ehe eds 6 66 Using MEMOBUS 6 66 Using the Timer Function 6 83 Using P Control muregi eo ta to ete eset matu 6 84 Energy savigi uoles err te an UM 6 94 S Setting Motor Parameters cto restat eit paseo aeta orta 6 95 Setting the VIEBBttelirq she et o tuae dde UN M ELLA 6 96 sse eco nd e a 6 102 Digital Operator Functions i esa el ater e mites 6 103 Setting Digital Operator Functions 6 103 Copying Parana tars Sch enses cest pes M a Sate e ca cei netu 6 106 Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator 6 110 S Sattingja P assWORI
4. Reference Parameters d BPreset Reference d1 Param eter Number Frequency reference 1 Description Sets the frequency reference Frequency reference 2 Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed command 1 is ON for a multi function input Frequency reference 3 Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed command 2 is ON for a multi function input Frequency reference 4 Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed commands 1 and 2 are ON for multi function inputs Jog frequency reference Sets the frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selec tion FJOG command or RJOG command is ON Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register Note The unit is set in 01 03 frequency units of reference setting and monitor default 0 01 Hz iReference Limits d2 Frequency refer ence upper limit Description Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of the max output frequency Setting Range Factory Setting 100 0 MEMO BUS Register Frequency refer ence lower limit Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of the maxi mum output frequency Master speed ref erence lower limit Sets the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the max output frequency No
5. 10 2 Motor Application Precautions uscire eec 10 5 User s t NR a eE RER 10 7 Inverter Application Precautions Selection Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter Binstalling Reactors A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600 kVA or higher or when switching a compensating capacitor Excessive peak current can destroy the rectifier section To prevent this install DC or AC reactor optional to improve the power supply power factor DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 22 to 300 kW If a thyristor converter such as a DC drive is connected in the same power supply system connect a DC or AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram 4000 Power supply capacity kVA 600 DC or AC reactor Required DC or Not required 0 60 400 Inverter capacity kVA Binverter Capacity When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter select the Inverter capacity so that the rated output current of the Inverter is minimum 1 1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents initial Torque The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the Inverter that is drivin
6. 6 44 Inverter Protection ssns tet e CR a Meanie 6 46 Inverter Overheat Protection cccccccccsseccssescssescssesccnesecsesconesecesesnesecsesecneseceeseceeseese 6 46 Input Phase Loss Detection Level tentent tette tte tentes 6 46 Ground Fault Pratectior o is SU ope oe p e dope epa OR 6 47 Cooling Fan Conic rias dence acie dot bsec oc bad rcu e dime 6 47 Setting the Ambient Temperature see tens 6 48 OL2 Characteristics at Low Spesa enitn Deiieb aie Det te i te ecd 6 48 Soft CLA Selection isole deett t netter 6 49 Input Terminal Functions nennen 6 50 Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit Terminals essen ene eene nene 6 50 Blocking the Inverter Output Baseblock Command 6 51 Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable Enable sssssse 6 51 Drive Enable Disable uo cde Gut ot cese et ca em ne oes ac 6 52 Bypass Drive Enable ee e e s etie aid c items 6 52 Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold 6 52 Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals UP DOWN 6 53 Trim Control Function Speed sss 6 56 Hold Analog Frequency Using User set Timing 6 57 Switching Operation Source to Communication Option
7. Fig 1 11 Removing the Terminal Cover Model CIMR E7Z25P5 Shown Above B Inverters of 22 kW or More Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover pull out the terminal cover in the direc tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2 M 3 Fig 1 12 Removing the Terminal Cover Model CIMR E7Z2022 Shown Above TIE UI D e y o Attaching the Terminal Cover When wiring the terminal block has been completed attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce dure For Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place X _ Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the front cover The removal and attachment procedures are described below iRemoving the Digital Operator Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the
8. Response Message Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H Start Higher 00H Start Higher 00H Error code 02H Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H Higher CDH CRC 16 Higher 00H Higher 00H Lower CIH Quantity Quantity Lower 02H Lower 02H No of data 04H Higher 10H CRC 16 Higher 00H Lower 08H Lead data Lower 01H Higher 02H Next data Lower 58H No of data 2 x quantity Higher 63H CRC 16 Lower 39H p e For the number of data value in the command message the double value of the data quantity must be taken IMPORTANT 6 73 e 74 iData Tables The data tables are shown below The types of data are as follows Reference data monitor data and broadcast data Reference Data The reference data table is shown below These data can be read and written They cannot be used for monitor ing functions Reserved Register No Contents Run operation and input commands Bit 0 Run stop command 1 Run 0 Stop Bit 1 Forward reverse operation 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bit 2 External error 1 Error EFO Bit 3 Error reset 1 Reset command Bit 4 ComNet Bit 5 ComCtrl Bit 6 Multi function input command 3 Bit 7 Multi function input command 4 Bit 8 Multi function input command 5 Bit 9 Multi
9. The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows Output frequency Frequency reference descending fe Jump frequency width d3 04 px Frequenty reference ascending Jump frequency width d3 04 2d Jump frequency width d3 04 Jump frequency reference Jump Jump Jump frequency 3 frequency 2 frequency 1 d3 03 d3 02 d3 01 Fig 6 24 Jump Frequency li Setting Precautions Set the jump frequencies according to the following formula d3 01 gt 43 02 gt 43 03 When parameters d3 01 to d3 03 are set to 0 Hz the jump frequency function 15 disabled Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function This section explains how to limit the motor speed Limiting Maximum Output Frequency If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency use parameter d2 01 Set the upper limit value of the frequency reference as a percentage taking E1 04 Maximum Output Fre quency to be 100 Related Parameters Param 1 eter Name Description Setting ry Access Range Setting Level Number Frequency reference upper Set the output frequency upper limit taking the 0 0 to m max output frequency to be 100 110 0 100 058 ne a Limiting Minimum Frequency If you do not want the motor to rotate below a given frequency use parameters d2 02 or d2 03 There are two methods of limiting the mini
10. Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands FJOG RJOG The FJOG RJOG function operates the inverter at the jog frequency It can be activated by using the terminal ON OFF operation When using the FJOG RJOG commands there is no need to input the RUN command To use this function set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital inputdigital input termi nal S3 to S7 function selection to 12 FJOG command or 13 RJOG command Related Parameters Param Greng S Setting Factory during Access eter Name Description n Range Setting Opera Level Number tion Sets the frequency reference when the jog fre 0t dl 17 Jog frequency reference quency reference selection FJOG command or 6 00 Hz Yes 3 120 00 RJOG command is ON Multi Function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set Value Function FJOG command ON Forward run at jog frequency 41 17 RJOG command ON Reverse run at jog frequency 41 17 BApplication Precautions Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands have the priority over other frequency references When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time the Inverter stops according to the setting in b1 03 stopping method selection Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors External Error Function The external error function activates the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation Using this
11. nal nal era tion Max Applica Bolus ble Motor Output kW 400V Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters 3 phase Dimensions mm Open Chassis IP00 540 7 Mass 240 270 365 Approx ing Table 1 4 Inverter Dimensions mm and Masses kg of 400V Class Inverters of 185 kW to 300 kW Caloric Value W Total Mount Exter Heat Internal nal Genera Holes d tion Cooling Method Checking and Controlling the Installation Site Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions Installation Site Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity EEEEM Enclosed wall mounted 10 to 40 C 95 RH or less no condensation Open chassis 10 to 45 95 RH or less no condensation Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18 5 kW or less in a panel Observ
12. Selection of PI feedback signal loss detection Description 0 No detection of PI feedback loss 1 Detection of PI feedback loss Operation continues during detection the fault contact is not operated 2 Detection of PI feedback loss The motor coasts to stop at detection and the fault contact operates Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register PI feedback loss detection level Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as percentage using the maxi mum output frequency as 100 PI feedback loss detection time Sets the PI feedback loss detection time Sleep function operation level Sets the sleep function start level as a frequency Sleep operation delay time Sets the delay time until the sleep function starts Accel decel time for PI reference Sets the accel decel time for the PI Softstarter SFS PI Setpoint Selec tion 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PI Setpoint PI target value PI Setpoint Scal ing Sets the unit for b5 19 U1 38 and 01 24 0 0 01 Hz 1 0 0196 the maximum output frequency E1 04 is taken as 10095 2 39 rpm set value is equal to motor poles 40 39999 User desired display A Sets the display value for 100 Sets the number of decimal digits Sleep Function Selection Sets the operation method of the PI sleep function 0 Output frequency before Soft st
13. Using the Timer Function The multi function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as timer function input terminals and multi function output terminals MI M2 and M3 MA can be used as timer function output terminals By setting the delay time you can prevent chattering of the sensors and switches Set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital input terminal S3 to S7 to 18 timer function input Set H2 01 or H2 02 multi function output terminals M1 M2 and M3 MA function selection to 12 timer function output Related Parameters Factory Access Setting Level Set the timer function output ON delay time dead Timer function ON delay time for the timer function input in 1 second units time Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 OO and H2 LILI Set the timer function output OFF delay time dead Timer function OFF delay time for the timer function input in 1 second units time Enabled when the timer function is set in 1 and H2 LILI ll Setting Example When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4 01 the timer output function is turned ON When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4 02 the timer output function is turned OFF An example of timer function operation 1s given in the following diagram Timer function input ow 1 1 I Li Fig 6 48 Timer Functio
14. Output frequency Zero speed level b2 01 Zero speed output OFF ON Fig 6 42 Timing Chart for Zero speed Binverter Operation Ready Setting 6 If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output will be switched ON when the initialisa tion of the inverter at startup has finished without any faults iDuring DC Bus Undervoltage Setting 7 If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus und ervoltage is detected iDuring Baseblock Setting 8 If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output 1s switched ON as long as the inverter out put is base blocked BFrequency Reference Source Selection Setting 9 If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is ON when the digital operator is selected as frequency reference source If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF iaRun Command Selection Status Setting A If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the digital operator is selected as RUN command source If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF iFault Output Setting E If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output 18 switched ON when any fault different from CPF00 and CPF01 occurs The output is also not switched at minor faults Refer to Chapter 7 Trouble shooting for a
15. Application Precautions Cannot be used with multi motor drives or with motors two or more sizes smaller than the Inverter capacity ilSpeed Calculation Search at Startup The motor may accelerate suddenly with light loads The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi function input terminals is shown below Run command Output frequency Output current OFF Deceleration time set in b3 03 Set frequency ref Starts using 7 calculated Speed erence b3 02 0 7 to 1 0 s Minimum baseblock time L2 03 x 0 7 Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Note If the stopping method is set to coast to stop and the run command turns ON in a short time the operation may be the same as the search in case 2 Fig 6 28 Speed Search at Startup Calculated Speed Speed Search after Short Baseblock during Power Loss Recovery etc Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 AC power supply Set frequency Start using reference Speed detected Output frequency Output current 1 After AC power supply recovery motor waits for Minimum baseblock time L2 03 x 0 75 1 the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Fig 6 29 Speed Search after Baseblock Calculated Speed Loss Time Is Set in L2 03 Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 0
16. A low Inverter voltage has been detected Repeat the read Replace the Digital Operator Display Meaning ID does not match Probable causes The Inverter product code or soft ware number is different Corrective Actions Use the copy function for the same product code and software number only Inverter capacity does not match The capacity of the Inverter being copied and the capacity stored in the Digital Operator are different Use the copy function for the same Inverter capacity only Verify error The parameter written to the Inverter was compared with the parameter in the Digital Operator and they were different Retry the copy Checksum error The checksum in the Inverter param eter area was compared with the checksum in the Digital Operator parameter area and they were differ ent Retry the copy Verify error The settings in the operator and the inverter do not match _ Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring and so on the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up If that occurs use this section as a reference and perform the appropriate counter measures If the contents of the fault are displayed refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions If Parameters Cannot Be Set BThe display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed
17. If set to 0 the HAND button on the digital operator is disabled and the drive will not enter the HAND mode and start to run when the HAND button is pressed 0 HAND button disabled 1 HAND button enabled Description 0 Normal operation 1 READ Inverter to Operator 2 COPY Operator to Inverter 3 Verify compare Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Read permission selection 0 READ prohibited 1 READ permitted T Motor Autotuning MEMO BUS Register Setting Factory Description Range Setting Motor output Sets the output power of the motor power in kilowatts Motor rated cur Sets the rated current of the motor rent in Amps The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given 2 The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given U Monitor Parameters B Status Monitor Parameters U1 Frequency refer ence Description Monitors sets the frequency ref erence value Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible MEMO BUS Register Output frequency Monitors the output frequency 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible Output current
18. 6 24 Limiting Maximum Output Frequency tete 6 24 Limiting Minimum 6 24 FIGQUENCY DOLE CUO I deuote te y eee se ees 6 25 Speed Agreement Function ccccccccessecsssecessesessessssesseseseesecseseceeseseeseceeseseeseseeseesess 6 25 Improved Operating Efficiency esee 6 27 Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start and Low speed Operation eene ennt nnne rennen stent 6 27 Hunting Prevention Function sse tene 6 28 Machine Protection 6 29 Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation 2 6 29 Detecting Motor Torque cas tst eate tara os tesco hae hal gated 6 30 Motor Overload PIDISCIOB etre e e eed ape ad s 6 32 Motor Overheat Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs 6 34 Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation 6 36 Automatic Restart 6 37 Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power 055 6 37 Speed Oe a eee Sp re E 6 38 Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost 6 43 Restarting Operation After Transient Error Auto Restart Function
19. Can be used to adjust the analog output when an instrument is connected to the FM or AM terminal 0 0 to 1000 0 H4 02 100 H4 05 50 Motor protection selection Used to enable or disable the motor over load protection function 0 Disabled 1 Protection for general purpose motor fan cooled Stall prevention selection during deceleration If using the dynamic brake option Brak ing Resistor Units and Braking Units be sure to set parameter L3 04 to 0 dis abled Selecting the V f pattern Set either one of the fixed patterns 0 to D in E1 03 V f Pattern Selection or set F in E1 03 to specify a user set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1 04 to E1 13 in advanced program ming mode Simple operation of a general purpose E1 03 0 or F default motor at 50 Hz If E1 03 F the default setting in the user setting from E1 04 to E1 13 are for 50 Hz tis recommended to perform non rotating autotuning for the line to line resistance if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling Autotuning E Autotuning for Line to Line Resistance Autotuning can be used to improve the performance when very long motor cables are used or when motor and inverter have different power ratings To perform autotuning set T1 02 Motor rated power and T1 04 Motor rated current and then press
20. DRIVE Lights up in Drive Mode QUICK Lights up in Quick Programming Mode ADV Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode VERIFY Lights up in Verify Mode A TUNE Lights up in Autotuning Mode Keys Execute operations such as setting user parameters monitoring jogging and autotuning Fig 3 1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions Digital Operator Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3 16 Table 3 1 Key Functions LOCAL 74 LOCAL REMOTE Key REMOTE Function Switches between operation via the Digital Operator LOCAL and control circuit terminal operation REMOTE This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user parameter 02 01 MENU Key Selects modes ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA ENTER Key was pressed JOG Key Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator Table 3 1 Key Functions Function Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator FWD REV Key Sets the active digit when programming user parameters Sh ESE Key Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred Selects menu items sets user parameter numbers and increments set Increment Key values Used to move to the next item or data Selects menu items sets user parameter numbers and decrements set Decrement Key
21. Input method for analog input A2 Multifunction analog output FM voltage I Current output current switch V Voltage output Multifunction analog output AM voltage I Current output current switch V Voltage output 2 B Sinking Sourcing Mode The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode 0 V common and sourcing mode 24V common by using the terminals SN SC and SP An external power supply is also supported providing more freedom in signal input methods Table 2 10 Sinking Sourcing Mode Selections Internal Power Supply Sinking Mode External Power Supply Sinking Mode SN 5 IP24V 424V External 24 5 IP24V 24V gt e lt Internal Power Supply Sourcing Mode External Power Supply Sourcing Mode External 24V 2 SC IP24V 24V IP24v 24v 4 5 Control Circuit Terminal Connections Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2 14 Multi function digital inputs Factory settings Varispeed E7 1 CIMR E7Z47P5 Forward Run Stop Reverse Run Stop External fault Fault reset Multi step speed setting 1 Multi step speed setting 2 Jog frequency selection 24V Shield Shield terminal terminal Analog input power supply 15 V 20 mA Analog input 1 Master 7
22. L3 04 1 This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration The inverter tries to decelerate within the set deceleration time It also observes the DC bus voltage If the DC bus voltage reaches the stall preven 6 tion level the deceleration is stopped and the output frequency is held When the DC bus voltage falls below the stall prevention level the deceleration will be continued L3 04 2 This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration The deceleration time set as C1 00 is taken as reference The function automatically tries to optimize the deceleration time by observing the DC bus voltage and shortening the deceleration time The function does not lengthen the deceleration time i e if C1 is set too short OV may occur li Setting Example An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3 04 is set to 1 is shown below Deceleration time controlled to prevent overvoltage Output frequency Time Deceleration time set value Fig 6 21 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation i Setting Precautions The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and input voltage Refer to the following table for details Inverter Rated Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration V 200 V class 380 E1 01 gt 400 V 400 V class E1 01 lt 400 V When using the braking option be sure to set parameter L3
23. Monitors the output current 10 V Inverter rated output current 0 to 10 V absolute value output Output voltage Monitors the output voltage refer ence value 10 V 200 VAC 400 VAC 0 to 10 V output DC bus voltage Monitors the main DC bus volt age 10 V 400 VDC 800 VDC 0 to 10 V output Output power Monitors the output power inter nally detected value 10 V Inverter capacity max applicable motor capacity 0 to 10 V possible Input terminal status Shows input ON OFF status lOo2nsiii 1 FWD command 41 10 1 is ON 1 REV command S2 is ON 1 Multi input 1 __ 53 is ON 1 Multi inpu S4 is ON 1 Multi inpu L S5 is ON 1 Multi inpu L S6 is ON 1 Multi inpu S7 is ON Cannot be output Output terminal status Shows output ON OFF status USE B 1 Multi function contact output 1 M1 M2 is ON 1 Multi function contact output 2 M3 M4 is ON Not used Always 0 1 Error output MA MB MC is ON Cannot be output eter Number Operation status Description Inverter operating status L Run Zero speed Reverse Reset signal input Speed agree Inverter ready Minor fault Major fault Output Signal Level During Multi Function A
24. RJOG command ON Reverse run at jog frequency d1 17 Fault reset Reset when turned ON Emergency stop NO Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1 09 when ON Emergency stop NC Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1 09 when OFF Timer function input Functions are set in b4 01 and b4 02 and the timer function outputs are set in H2 LILI PI control disable ON PI control disabled Parameters write enable ON parameters can be written in OFF parameters are write pro tected Trim control increase ON d4 02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference Trim control decrease ON d4 02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency reference Setting Value Function 1E Analog frequency reference sample hold External fault ale Input mode NO contact NC contact Detection mode Normal during operation 30 PI control integral reset reset when reset command 15 input or when stopped during PI control 31 PI control integral hold ON Hold 34 PI soft starter disable ON disabled 35 PI input characteristics switch 36 Operation Source Option Inverter selection 2 ON inverter settings 60 Motor pre heat command ON Performs motor pre heat 61 External search command 1 ON Speed search from maximum output frequency 62 External search command 2 ON Speed search from set frequency 64 External speed sear
25. The following causes are possible The Inverter is operating drive mode There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation Turn off the RUN command and then make the settings Parameter write enable is input This occurs when parameter write enable set value 1B is set for a multi function input terminal H1 01 to H1 05 If the parameter write enable input is OFF the parameters cannot be changed Turn it ON and then set the parameters Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the parameter A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting numbers are different the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed Reset the password If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Reset key and the Menu key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Then reset the password Input the reset password in parameter A1 04 BOPEO01 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the parameter is wrong Refer to page 7 9 Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the p 8 setting BCPFO00 or CPF01 is displayed This is a Digital Operator communications error The connection between the Digital Operator and the Inverter may be faulty Remove the Digital Operator and then re connect it 7 12 If the Motor Does Not Operate EThe motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed The following causes are possible
26. enne 7 16 If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates when a RUN Command is Input 7 16 If There is Mechanical 7 16 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is 7 17 f OV Overvoltage or OC Overcurrent is Detected When Fan is Started or a Fan 5 7 17 if Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference 7 17 Maintenance and Inspection sss 8 1 Maintenance and Inspection 8 2 Outline of Maintenance 8 2 Daily inspections eL 8 2 Periodic Inspectigri tt atletas de T 8 2 Periodic Maintenance of Parts duc ccc sete tectae t oe ur act eat tam idet 8 3 Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ssssssseseeetettettette teens 8 4 Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card 8 6 Ijer rei er iio p EM 9 1 Standard Inverter Specifications 9 2 Specifications by erat 9 2 Common Specifi
27. 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation 4 Continue operation with the frequency refer ence set in 41 04 Communications error detec tion selection Sets whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a communications error 0 Do not detect 1 Detect Send wait time Sets the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the Inverter starts to send RTS control ON OFF Enables or disables RTS control 0 Disabled RTS is always ON 1 Enabled RTS turns ON only when sending CE detection time Sets the time before CE error Communication error is detected when MEMOBUS communica tion is used Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1 01 and b1 02 Monitoring operation status of the inverter Setting and reading parameters Resetting errors Inputting multi function commands An OR operation is performed between the multi function com mands input from the PLC and commands input from multi function digital input terminals S3 to S7 6 68 iaMessage Format In MEMOBUS communications the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds The mes sage format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below and the length of data packets depends on the command function
28. 8810108 8 to 2 0 50 to 150 50 x 2P MI2 31410392 1910300 1 0x2P 1 11 4200 1200 A400 400 M4 L3tol4 201510 o Table 2 2 400 V Class Wire Sizes Ri Inverter Termi Tightening Possible Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes 2 Wire Type cIMR O Screws Nem mm away Se R LI S L2 T L3 300 x 2b U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 817121 T1 L33 _ 2b 95 to 300 M16 7841098 300 x 2P ae 4 0 to 600 774185 Ped 4 0 to 600 600 x 2P b 3 95 x 2P 3 0 x 2P 1 11 A200 5200 4400 3400 M4 13tol4 20 te 10 d R LI S L2 T L3 G00 k 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L33 00 25 95 to 300 Set MI6 7841098 4009600 ee i 4b Power cables E7Z4220 e g 600 V vinyl 3 power cables 120 x 2P 250 x 2P 1 11 A200 5200 1400 2400 M4 13tol4 26 to 10 d RLI S L2 T L3 120 x 4P RI LII SUL21 TI L31 250 x 4P U T1 V T2 W T3 an 4b 95 to 300 5 G MIG 7841098 git 600 240x4P 774300 400 x 4P b 3 120 x 2P 250 x 2P 1 11 A200 200 400 5400 M4 1 31014 20 to 10 d The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C am P a Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2 of the rated voltage R4 2 Line voltage drop is calculated as follows IMPORTANT Line voltage drop V x wire
29. Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor Speed Ranges Cooling effects diminish in the low speed range resulting in an increase of the motor temperature Therefore the motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range whenever using a fan cooled motor Installation Withstand Voltage If the input voltage is high 480 V or higher or the wiring distance is long the motor insulation voltage must be considered Contact your Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative for details E Acoustic Noise Noise varies with the carrier frequency At high carrier frequencies the noise is almost the same when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply Using the Inverter for Special Motors Observe the following precautions when using a special motor BPole changing Motor The rated input current of pole changing motors differs from that of standard motors Select an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor iSubmersible Motor The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors Therefore always select an Inverter by checking its rated output current When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent voltage drop and thereby motor torque reduction BExplosion proof Motor
30. When an explosion proof motor is to be used it must be subjected to an explosion proof test in conjunction with the Inverter This is also applicable when an existing explosion proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter Since the Inverter itself is however not explosion proof always install it in a safe place ilGearmotor The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer In particular continuous operation of an oil lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in damaging If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz consult the manufacturer i Single phase Motor Do not use an Inverter for a single phase motor The motor should be replaced with a 3 phase motor __ _ Power Transmission Mechanism Speed Reducers Belts and Chains If an oil lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at low speeds continuously M User Parameters Factory settings are given in the following table These are factory settings for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0 4 kW open loop vector control Factory Setting Seug 1 00 Language selection for digital oper
31. ance Momentary power loss ride through time Min baseblock BB time Voltage recovery time Overheat pre alarm level Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V class Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 11 kW If C6 02 is set to 0 1 or F and the initial value of C6 03 and C6 04 is 2 0 kHz the initial settings for C6 02 are as follows 2 5 0 kHz 3 8 0 kHz 4 10 kHz 5 12 5 kHz and 6 15 kHz If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced 8400 V Class Inverters Name Factory Setting Inverter Capacity 3 7 4 0 kVA selection Energy saving coeffi 24 25 b8 04 ciini 576 40 447 40 338 80 313 60 245 80 236 44 189 50 145 38 140 88 126 26 Carrier frequency selec C6 02 nol 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 tion E2 01 Motor rated current A 1 00 1 60 3 10 4 20 7 00 7 00 9 80 13 30 19 9 26 5 E2 03 Motor no load current A 0 60 0 80 1 40 1 50 2 30 2 30 2 60 4 00 5 6 7 6 E2 05 Md TES resist W 38 198 22459 10 100 6 495 3 333 3 333 1 595 1 152 0 922 0 550 12 02 Momentary power loss or o1 o2 05 05 08 08 10 20 ride thro
32. c in nouns desis 1 Aouenbal4 D EE 0 eouesajay Aouen 913 Fig 6 50 PI Control Block Diagram EPI Feedback Loss Detection When performing PI control be sure to use the PI feedback loss detection function Otherwise if the PI feed back gets lost the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency When b5 12 is set to 1 and the PI feedback value falls below the PI feedback loss detection level 65 13 for a time longer than the PI feedback loss detection time b5 14 a Fbl alarm Feedback loss will be displayed at the operator and inverter operation is continued When the same happens and b5 12 is set to 2 a Fbl fault will be displayed on the digital operator and the inverter operation will be stopped The motor coasts to stop and the fault contact 15 operated The time chart for PI feedback loss detection is shown below PI feedback value Time No Fbl detection detection detection time Loss detection time b5 14 b5 14 Fig 6 51 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart Sleep Function The PI sleep function can be used in two different modes which depends on the setting of b5 21 If b5 21 is set to 0 the frequency reference PI target value is taken as an input value for the sleep function If b2 21 is set to 1 the output frequency before the softstarter SFS input C1 00 C2 00 is taken as
33. quency Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration deceleration switch ing If the output frequency is below the set frequency Accel decel time 2 If the output frequency is above the set frequency Accel decel time 1 The multi function input accel decel time 1 or accel decel time 2 has priority B S Curve Acceleration Deceleration C2 MEMO BUS Register Setting Factory Description Range Setting When the S curve characteristic time is set the accel time will increase by only half of the S curve characteristic times S curve charac at start and end teristic time at acceleration start Run command ON C2 02 Output frequency S curve charac _ C2 01 C2 02 teristic time at accel 7 SEMIS 2 acceleration end The S Curve characteristic time at start and end of deceleration is fixed to 0 2 sec and can not be changed iTorque Compensation C4 Darum Settin Facto MEM eter Description 9 ry BUS Number Register Range Setting Sets the torque compensation gain Usually setting is not necessary Adjust under the following circum stances When the cable is long increase the set value When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capac 0 00 to 4H ity Max applicable motor 2 50 1 00 Yes A 215H 6 27 capacity increase the set val ues When the motor is oscillating decrease the set values Adjust the t
34. 12 R LI S L2 T L3 1 2 BI B2 T1 V T2 W T3 E7Z25P5 U TI M4 1 2 to 1 5 10 10 R LI S L2 T L3 1 42 BI B2 1 T U TI V T2 W T3 E7Z27P5 M5 2 5 8 to 6 8 7 Power cables R L1 S L2 T L3 1 42 BI B2 i i e g 600 V vinyl U T1 V T2 W T3 772011 M5 2 5 6 to 4 6 power cables R LI S L2 T L3 1 42 U TI V T2 M6 4 0 to 5 0 25 25 W T3 dice 4 to 2 4 E7Z2015 10 _ Bl B2 M5 2 5 8 to 6 25 25 M6 4 0 to 5 0 i 4 4 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 2 U TI V T2 Mg 9 0 to 10 0 25 to 35 25 W T3 3 to 2 3 E7Z2018 10 _ Bl B2 M5 2 5 8 to 6 25 25 M6 4 0 to 5 0 4 4 R L1 S L2 T L3 41 U TI V T2 M8 9 0 to 10 0 25 to 35 25 W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 3 to 1 3 E7Z2022 10 to 16 _ 3 6 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 4 25 to 35 25 M8 9 0 to 10 0 to 2 4 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI M8 9 0 to 10 0 50 50 V T2 W T3 811 21 TI L31 1 to 1 0 1 E7Z2030 10 to 16 _ 3 M6 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 4 25 to 35 25 M8 9 0 to 10 0 4 to 2 4 Table 2 1 200 V Class Wire Sizes 7 Possibl Recom Inverter Termi Tightening Ossible mended Wire j Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Si 2 Wire Type CIMR O Screws Nem mm AWG AWG R LI S L2 T L3 G1 U TI MIO 1760225 70095 70 V T2 W T3 R1 L11
35. 60 60 The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters The values will double for 400 V class Inverters Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 8200 V Class Inverters Name Factory Setting Inverter Capacity kVA selection Energy saving coeffi cient Carrier frequency selec Motor rated current Motor no load current Motor line to line resist ance Momentary power loss ride through time Min baseblock BB time Voltage recovery time Overheat pre alarm level Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V class Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 11 kW f C6 02 is set to 0 1 or F and the initial value of C6 03 and C6 04 is 2 0 kHz the initial settings for C6 02 are as follows 2 5 0 kHz 3 8 0 kHz 4 10 kHz 5 12 5 kHz and 6 15 kHz If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced Parame ter Num ber Name Factory Setting Inverter Capacity 02 04 kVA selection Energy saving coeffi cient Carrier frequency selec tion Motor rated current Motor no load current Motor line to line resist
36. 81121 T1 L31 010779 2 0 to 4 0 2 0 6 to 16 D3 M8 8 8 to 10 8 772037 MIO 17 61022 5 C to 2 0 o 7L A D M4 L3tol4 20 to 10 16 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI MIO 1760225 95 95 2 V T2 W T3 RI L11 81121 T1 L31 3 0 to 4 0 3 0 x 6 to 16 M8 8 8 010 8 E7Z2045 aoe MIO 17 6 to 22 5 Gio 2 0 rl A D M4 L3tol4 0 t6 10 i x oe 50 to 95 50 x 2P S L2 T L3 1 M12 31 4t0392 cio t 4 0 1 0 x 2p U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 811 21 TI L31 M10 17 6 to 22 5 4 0 4 0 E7Z2055 3 M8 8810108 m i po 35 to 95 50 MIO 172610225 Ga 1 0 rl 2 M4 13tol4 0 t6 10 ae 95 to 122 95 x 2P R L S L2 T L3 1 MI2 31410392 go 550 Gi0 x 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 811 21 TI L31 MIO 17610225 gig 4 0 id 52 de 00 vial 610 70 power cables E7Z2075 3 M8 8810108 94 2 0 95 to 185 95 MIO 17610225 379 t 400 3 0 rl 2 M4 131014 Re c 150to185 150x2P S L2 T L3 1 xil et gee o 250 to 400 250 x 2P 95 to 150 95 x 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 811 21 TI L31 4 0 to 300 4 0 x 2P 6 to 70 E7Z2090 3 M8 8810108 949 2 0 5 70 to 150 70 x 2P MI2 31410392 5510300 2 0 x 2P zl 2 M4 13t014 1 240 x 2P or ars 240 to 300 50 x 4P R LI 5 72 T L3 1 350 to 600 350 x 2P or 1 0 x 2P M12 31 4 to 39 2 2 U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 811 21 TI
37. 81121 TI L31 1 to 1 0 1 E7Z4055 M6 4005 0 8 E M8 9010100 s 2 a T 70 to 95 70 RILI S L2 1 MIO 31419392 19410 0 0 U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SUL21 T1 L31 MIO 17 6 to 22 5 L0 to 4 0 A0 774075 3 M8 8810108 10124 MIO 31410392 Q 2 0 r I1 1200 1200 400 400 M4 L3tol4 6 95 95 R LI S L2 T L3 1 MIO 31410392 Gigi 4 0 4 0 U TI V T2 WITS RULI SI L21 TIL3I MIO 17619225 3 9 z 4 0 4 0 E7Z4090 3 M8 8810108 18 50 to 95 50 MIO 31410392 11040 Power cables e g 600 V vinyl 1 11 A200 5200 4400 1400 M4 131014 QU 10 o power cables R LI S L2 T L3 1 50 to 95 50 x 2P S L2 TIL3 MIO 31410392 U TI V T2 W T3 SUL2I TUL3I 1 0 to 4 0 1 0 x 2P 10 to 70 M8 8810108 774110 gt 8 to 2 0 70 to 150 70 MI2 31410392 2049300 Q0 r I1 4200 1200 4400 4400 13t014 Goro o R LI S L2 T L3 1 o S L2 T L3 3 0 to 4 0 3 0 x 2P MIO 31410392 S Ed S U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 81721 TI L31 Qo 4 0 0 x 2P E7Z4132 3 M8 8810108 8162 0 i 95 to 150 95 MI2 31410392 409 300 4 0 r I1 A200 200 400 5 400 M4 13to14 QU 8 10 Se 95 to 185 95 x 2P R LI S L2 T L3 datio eso aco 4 0 to 400 4 0 x 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 TI L31 22 t0105 E 2 W T3 gt gt 3 0 to 400 3 0 x 2P 724160 43 M8
38. A200 2 200 5 A400 2400 Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models Fig 2 5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections Wiring the Main Circuits This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs BWiring Main Circuit Inputs Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input Installing Fuses To protect the inverter it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below Table 2 5 Input Fuses 2004 mum mo o xw 0 v 453 2100 9000 2700 55000 1000 55000 7100 61000 11000 61000 13000 83000 40 s 4m 485 a 2 589 3000 55000 3800 55000 5400 23000 7900 62000 14000 250000 as 20000 250000 eo 480 52000 92000 Installing a Moulded case Circuit Breaker When connecting the power input terminals R L2 S L2 and T L3 to the power supply using a moulded case circuit breaker MCCB observe that the circuit breaker 1s suitable for the Inverter Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1 5 to 2 times of the inverter s rated current For the MCCB s time characteristics be sure to consider the inverter s overload protection one minute at 150 of the rated output current Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker Inverter outputs use high speed switching so high frequency leakage current is generated If an earth leakag
39. Disable Enable Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register Energy saving coefficient Sets the energy saving coefficient Adjust the value in 596 steps until the output power becomes mini mal Power detection filter time con stant Sets the time constant for output power detection Search operation voltage limiter Sets the limit value of the voltage control range during search opera tion Set to 0 to disable the search oper ation 100 is the motor rated volt age The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity Tuning Parameters C BlAcceleration Deceleration C1 Param eter Number Acceleration time 1 Description Sets the acceleration time to accel erate from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency Deceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decel erate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz Acceleration time 2 Sets the acceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 1 is set to ON Deceleration time 2 Sets the deceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 1 is set to ON Emergency stop time Sets the deceleration time when the multi function input Emergency fast stop is set to ON Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level Accel decel time switching fre
40. E1 06 E1 07 and E1 09 do not satisfy the following conditions 1 04 FMAX gt 1 06 FA gt E1 07 FB gt E1 09 FMIN E3 02 FMAX gt E3 04 FA gt E3 05 FB gt E3 07 FMIN Parameter setting error One of the following parameter setting errors exists C6 05 Carrier frequency Gain gt 6 and C6 03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit lt C6 04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit Upper lower limit error in C6 03 to 04 EEPROM write error A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM Try turning the power supply off and on again Try setting the parameters again Errors During Autotuning The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table If an error is detected the motor will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator The error contact output and alarm output will not function Display Probable causes Corrective Actions There is an error in the data input for autotuning There is an error in the relationship between the motor power and the motor rated current A minor fault occurred during autotun Alarm ing Motor data error IEc 03 STOP key input The STOP key was pressed to cancel autotuning Autotuning was not completed in the Line to line resis tance error specified time The results of autotuning has exceeded the setting range for a user parameter Rated current settin f f heck the input dat
41. E2 05 is set automatically when performing motor line to line resistance autotuning When you cannot per 6 form tuning consult the motor manufacturer for the line to line resistance value Calculate the resistance from the line to line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula and then make the setting accordingly E type insulation Line to line resistance at 75 of test report x 0 92 B type insulation Line to line resistance at 75 C of test repor t x 0 92 F type insulation Line to line resistance at 115 C of test report x 0 87 Setting the V f Pattern Using the E1 LI1LI parameters the Inverter input voltage and the V f pattern can be set as needed It is not rec ommended to change the settings when the motor is used in open loop vector control mode Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting Sets the Inverter input voltage This setting is used Input voltage setting as a reference value for protection functions 0 to D Select from the 14 preset V f patterns V f pattern selection F Custom user set patterns Applicable for setting of E1 04 to E1 10 Max output frequency FMAX Output voltage V Max voltage VMAX E VBASE 1 13 Base frequency FA Mid output frequency FB Mid output frequency voltage FMIN FB FA FMAX VB E1 09 1 07
42. EF EFO Bit 8 Control board error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit A Not used Bit B Main circuit undervoltage UV detected Bit C Main circuit undervoltage UV 1 control power supply error UV2 inrush prevention circuit error UV3 power loss Bit D Not used Bit E MEMOBUS communications error CE Bit F Operator disconnected OPR Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to F Not used 6 Frequency Monitors U1 01 reference Output frequency Monitors U1 02 Output voltage Monitors U1 06 Output current Monitors U1 03 Output power Monitors U1 08 Not used Not used Not used Control terminals input status Bit 0 Input terminal S1 Bit 1 Input terminal S2 Bit2 Multi function input terminal S3 Bit3 Multi function input terminal S4 Bit4 Multi function input terminal S5 Bit 5 Multi function input terminal S6 Bit 6 Multi function input terminal S7 Bits 7 to F Not used 6 78 Register No Contents Inverter status Bit 0 Operation Operating Bit 1 Zero speed Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency agree Agreement Bit 3 User defined speed agree 1 Agreement Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequenc
43. Option Card Stopping method selec tion Select stopping method when stop com mand is input 0 Deceleration to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC braking stop Stops faster than coast to stop without regenerative operation Coast to stop with timer Run com mands are disregarded during deceler ation time Prohibition of reverse opera tion Reverse enabled Reverse disabled Output Phase Rotation both rota tional directions are enabled 3 Output Phase Rotation with Reverse prohibited Timer function ON delay time Sets the timer function output ON delay time dead time for the timer function input Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 O0 and H2 00 PI control mode selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 PI control enabled frequency refer ence PI output ber Proportional gain P Description Sets P control proportional gain P control is not performed when the set ting is 0 00 Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Integral I time Sets I control integral time I control is not performed when the set ting is 0 0 Integral I limit Sets the I control limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PI limit Sets the limit after PI control as a per centage of the maximum output fre quency PI offset adjust ment Sets the offset after PI control as a
44. PI target value ter ber PI Setpoint Scaling Description Sets the unit for b5 19 U1 38 and U1 24 0 0 01 Hz 1 0 0196 the maximum output fre quency 1 04 is taken as 100 2 39 rpm set value is equal to motor poles 40 39999 User desired display A Sets the display value for 100 Sets the number of decimal digits Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Sleep Function Selection Sets the operation method of the PI sleep function 0 Output frequency before Softstarter SFS 1 Frequency reference PI target 2 Snooze Snooze Level Sets the frequency level at which the snooze operation starts as percentage of the max output frequency Snooze Delay Time Sets a delay timer for the snooze function Wake Up Level Sets the feedback level at which the inverter wakes up from snooze operation Setpoint Boost Sets the PI setpoint boost when the snooze mode is activated If it is reached once the output will be switched off The value is set as percentage of the PI set point Maximum Boost Time Sets the maximum time the boost opera tion is performed Snooze feed back PI Snooze function will only be activated when the feedback value is above this parameter setting The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint PI Feedback Square Root Operation
45. Ramp Hold or Up Down com mands are set Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Access Level MEMO BUS Register t Speed limits Sets the frequency to be added to or subtracted from the analog fre quency reference as a percentage of the max output frequency Enabled when the Trim control increase command or Trim control decrease command is set for a multi function input EV f Pattern E1 Input voltage set ting Motor Parameters E Description Sets the Inverter input voltage This setting is used as a reference value for protection functions Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register V f pattern selec tion 0 to D Select from the 14 preset patterns F Custom user set pattern Applicable for setting of E1 04 to E1 10 Max output fre quency FMAX Max output volt age VMAX Base frequency FA Mid output fre quency FB Mid output fre quency voltage VB Min output fre quency FMIN Min output fre quency voltage VMIN Output Voltage V VMAX E1 05 BASE E1 13 FA FMAX E1 06 E1 04 Frequency Hz FMIN FB E1 09 E1 07 To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the setting for El 08 will be disregarded Always ensure that the fou
46. Replace the capacitor or Inverter Periodic Maintenance of Parts The Inverter consists of many parts and these parts must be operating properly in order to ensure full func tioning of the Inverter Among the electronic components there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage condi tions In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time it is necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter s installation environment and usage conditions The Inverter s maintenance periods are noted below Keep them as reference Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part Replace with new part Determine need by Smoothing capacitor 5 years inspection Soft charge resistor bypass con Determine need by inspection tactor Fuses 10 years Replace with new part Replace with new board Determine need by inspection Aluminum capacitors on PCBs 5 years Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions Ambient temperature Yearly average of 30 C Load factor 80 max Operating rate 12 hours max per day Cooling Fan Replacement Outline 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter If t
47. To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator use the following method Digital Operator Display Explanation Press the MENU key and select advanced program ming mode DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the DATA ENTER key to enter programming mode e e e oe DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Select parameter 03 01 Copy Function Selection eo using the Increment key and Decrement key DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the parameters setting display DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Change the set value to 1 using the Increment key DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the DATA ENTER key The READ function will start DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE If the READ function ends normally End is dis played on the Digital Operator Parameter 03 01 is automatically reset to 0 and then the display returns to 03 01 If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Error displays and their meanings are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function Error Display Meaning You are attempting to set 03 01 to 1 while 03 02 is set to 0 Read data length mismatch or read data error Tried to write parameters to EEPROM on the Digital Operator but unable to perform write operation Select READ Prohibited This function prevents ove
48. board has to be turned to OFF for A2 voltage input The factory setting is ON A2 current input For the same reason the parameter H3 08 analog input terminal A2 signal level has to be set to 0 0 10V input Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation If the motor reverse rotation is prohibited a reverse run command will not be accepted even if it 1s input Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems e g fans pumps etc It is also possible to change the output phase order by changing b1 04 to 2 or 3 This much easier and faster than changing the wiring if the motor rotational direction is wrong Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting 0 Reverse enabled Prohibition of reverse opera 1 Reverse disabled tion 2 Output Phase Rotation 3 Output Phase Rotation Reverse disabled a Automatic Restart This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation after a momentary power loss Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss After a momentary power loss the Inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation To restart the Inverter after power 18 recovered set L2 01 to 1 or 2 If L2 01 is set to 1 the inverter will restart when power is recovered within the time set in L2 02 If the powe
49. eter Number Monitor selection Description Set the number of the 3rd monitor item to be displayed in the Drive Mode 01 00 Not on LCD operator Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register Monitor selec tion after power up Sets the monitor item to be dis played when the power is turned on 1 Frequency reference 2 Output frequency 3 Output current 4 The monitor item set for o1 01 Frequency units of reference set ting and monitor Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency refer ence and frequency monitor 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 0196 units Maximum output frequency is 100 2 to 39 rpm units Set the motor poles 40 to 39999 User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max output frequency A Sets the value that is to be displayed at 100 excluding the decimal point Sets the number of decimal places Example When the max output frequency value is 200 0 set 12000 LCD Focus Sets the brightness on the optional LCD operator JVOP 160 OY 0 light 1 2 3 normal 4 5 dark Monitor Mode Selection 0 Below the active monitor parameter the next 2 sequential monitors are displayed 1 Below the active monitor the 2 monitors specified by 01 07 and 01 08 are locked 2nd Monitor Selection Selects the monitor that is dis pl
50. monics tion DC reactor Optional Built in Control Characteristics The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa motor When selecting the actual motor and Inverter be sure that the Inverter s rated current is applicable for the motor s rated current 2 A transformer with dual star delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification 8400 V Class Model Number CIMR E7Z O Max applicable motor output kW 22 3 7 4 0 Rated output capacity kVA Rated output current A 3 7 53 7 6 8 7 12 5 4 0 5 8 6 6 Max output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Output Ratings Max output frequency Hz 200 0 Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage fluctua 10 15 Allowable frequency fluc tuation Power Supply Characteristics DC reactor Optional Measures for power supply harmonics 12 phase rec Not possile tification Control Characteristics Model Number CIMR E7Z O Max applicable motor out 37 45 55 75 90 132 185 put kW Rated output capacity kVA 57 69 85 110 140 160 200 280 Rated output current A 75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304 370 Max
51. ut FUR 6 4 Selecting the Frequency Reference Source sssssssssssseeeeeeenenees 6 4 Using Multi Step Speed Operation 6 6 R n Command Mcr CE 6 8 Selecting the Run Command Source 6 8 Stopping Methods cette recte ee rb th taeda 6 10 Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is 6 10 Using the DC Injection Brakel e ore o etc ete b ee itt 6 12 Motor Pre heat Function ied otn tasca emitte ed dee ae 6 13 Using an Emergency Stop sss nennen 6 14 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics 6 15 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times eee 6 15 Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function 6 17 Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function 6 19 Adjusting Frequency References 6 21 Adjusting Analog Frequency References 6 21 Operation Avoiding Resonance Jump Frequency Function 6 23 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function
52. 04 sets the HSB overload time If the output frequency does not change for any reason although an HSB command is given an OL7 fault will be displayed and the fault contact will operate Multifunction Input Settings H1 01 to H1 05 Terminal S3 to S7 High Slip Braking 68 If one of the multifunction inputs is set to 68 it can be used to activate the HSB function The inverter will brake the motor immediately after the HSB command was given HSB cannot be stopped i e normal inverter operation cannot be resumed MM M Digital Operator Functions Setting Digital Operator Functions Related Parameters Param eter Number Monitor selection Description Set the number of the 3rd monitor item to be dis played in the Drive Mode 01 00 Not on LCD operator JVOP 160 OY Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Access Level Monitor selection after power up Set the monitor item to be displayed when the power supply is turned ON 1 Frequency reference 2 Output frequency 3 Output current 4 The monitor item set for o1 01 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 01 Maximum output frequency is 100 rotation per minute rpm Sets the motor poles User desired display Set the desired values for setting and dis play
53. 1 0 65 11 Pl reverse output selection 0 EE b5 12 Selection of PI feedback loss detection 0 b5 13 PI feedback loss detection level b5 14 PI feedback loss detection time b5 15 PI sleep function operation level b5 16 PI sleep operation delay time 10 7 Acceleration deceleration time for PI reference Factory Setting Setting PI Setpoint Selection PI Setpoint PI Setpoint Scaling PI Sleep Function Selection Snooze Level Snooze Delay Time Wake Up level Setpoint Boost Maximum Boost Time Snooze feedback PI Feedback Square Root Operation PI Feedback Square Root Gain PI Output Monitor Square Root Energy saving mode selection Energy saving coefficient Power detection filter time constant Search operation voltage limiter Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 Emergency stop time Accel decel time switching frequency S curve characteristic time at acceleration start S curve characteristic time at acceleration end Torque compensation gain Torque compensation time constant Carrier frequency selection Carrier Frequency Upper Limit Carrier Frequency Lower Limit Carrier Freq Proportional Gain Frequency reference 1 Frequency reference 2 Frequency reference 3 Frequency reference
54. 1 06 1 04 Fi H Min output frequency FMIN PENNA To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the setting for E1 08 will be disregarded Min output frequency voltage Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in VMIN the following manner E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA gt 1 07 FB gt E1 09 FMIN Mid output frequency 2 Set only to fine adjust V f for the output range Normally this setting is not required Mid output frequency voltage 2 Base voltage VBASE Sets the output vltage at the base frequency E1 06 These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double 2 The contents of parameters E1 11 and 1 12 are ignored when set to 0 00 i Setting Inverter Input Voltage Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1 01 so that it matches the power supply voltage This set value will be the reference value for the protection functions and similar functions overvoltage level stall level i Setting V f Pattern The V f pattern can be selected using parameter E1 03 There are two methods of setting the V f pattern Select one of the 14 preset pattern types set value 0 to E or set a user defined V f pattern set value F The factory setting for E1 03 is F To select one of the existing patterns refer to the following table Characteristic C
55. 10 00 is dis played DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Shift RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Increment Key pressed to change set value to 20 00 s DATA ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data END is displayed for 10 s and then the entered value is displayed for 0 5 s DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE The monitor display for C1 01 returns Verify Mode Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a pro gramming mode or by autotuning None will be displayed if no settings have been changed Even in verify mode the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming modes Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys to change the settings The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA ENTER key is pressed BExample Operations An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings b1 01 Reference Selection C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 E1 01 Input Voltage Setting and E2 01 Motor Rated Current 3 Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display Verify Mode Frequency reference Frequency reference selection selection e e DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATU
56. 4 Jog frequency reference Frequency reference upper limit Frequency reference lower limit Master speed reference lower limit Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 3 Jump frequency width Frequency reference hold function selection Factory Setting 0 Setting Speed limits 10 Input voltage setting 200 v V f pattern selection F Max output frequency 50 0 Hz Max voltage 200 0 V2 Base frequency 50 0 Hz Mid output frequency 2 5 Hz Mid output frequency voltage 15 0 v Min output frequency 1 2 Hz Min output frequency voltage 9 0 V2 Mid output frequency 2 0 0 Hz Mid output frequency voltage 2 0 0 v Base voltage 0 0 4 Motor rated current 1 90 Motor no load current 1 2 2 Motor line to line resistance 9 8420 Operation selection after communications error 1 Input level of external error from Communications Option Card 0 Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card 1 I monitor unit selection 1 Terminal S3 function selection 24 Terminal S4 function selection 14 Terminal S5 function selection Terminal S6 function selection Terminal S7 function selection Terminal M1 M2 function selection Terminal M3 M4 function selection Gain
57. C Set Value 1 cteristics Set Value 4 to 7 Set Value 5 0 13 25 50 Hz Set Value 9 22 11 0 132 5 50 Hz n Set Value C to E Set Value D V 200 60 90 Hz Set Value 2 Set Value 6 Set Value A 50 60 Hz 60 Hz Set Value E Set Value 3 Set Value 7 Set Value B 60 72 Hz 60 Hz 55 to 300 kW V f Pattern The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Constant Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 0 1 3 2 5 Variable Torque Characteristics Set Value 4 to 7 Set Value 4 High Startup Torque Set Value 8 to B 50 Hz Set Value 8 15 7 0 1 31 5 Fixed Output Operation Set Value C to E 50 Hz Set Value C Set Value 1 Set Value 5 V 200 13 25 Set Value 9 20 9 0 1325 Set Value 2 Set Value 6 V 200 50 Hz Set Value A 50 Hz Set Value D 60 90 Hz 60 120 Hz 50 60 Hz 60 Hz Set Value E V Set Value 3 60 72 Hz Set Value 7 V 200 60 Hz Set Value B A When E1 03 is set to F User defined V f pattern you can set the parameters E1 04 to E1 10 If E1 03 is set to anything other than F you can only read parameters E1 04 to E1 10 If the V f characteristics INFO are
58. Detection Motor current output torque Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10 of the Inverter rated output current L6 02 Overtorque detection 1 NO Undertorque Detection Motor current output torque Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10 of the Inverter rated output current L6 02 Undertorque detection 1 NO Motor Overload Protection The motor can be protected from overload using the Inverter s built in electronic thermal overload relay func tion Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting Sets the motor rated current of motor 1 This set value becomes the base value for motor protection and torque limit It is an input data for autotuning Motor rated current Set to enable or disable the motor overload protec tion function using the electronic thermal relay 0 Disabled 1 General motor protection fan cooled motor 2 With applications where the power supply is often Motor protection selection turned ON and OFF there is a risk that the motor cannot be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 because the thermal value will be reset If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter set this parameter to 0 and install a thermal relay in each motor Set the electronic thermal detection time in min utes Normally there is no need to make this setting The fact
59. Enables or disables the square root opera tion for the PI feedback value 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PI Feedback Square Root Gain Sets the gain for the feedback when square root operation is enabled PI Output Mon itor Square Root Selects whether the PI output monitor is shown as square root value or not 0 Disable 1 Enable Energy saving mode selection Select whether to enable or disable energy saving control 0 Disable 1 Enable ter ber Acceleration time 1 Description Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output fre quency Deceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Frequency ref erence upper limit Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of the max output fre quency 100 0 Frequency ref erence lower limit Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency Input voltage setting Sets the inverter input voltage This set value will be the basis for the protection functions Motor rated cur rent Sets the motor rated current in Amps This set value becomes the base value for motor protection and torque limit It is an input data for autotuning Operation selec tion after com m
60. For the case that a fault occurs during operation make sure that the STOP key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible At first set the frequency reference to a low speed e g to one tenth of the normal operating speed B Checking Operating Status Having checked that the operating direction 1s correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed increase the frequency reference After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction check that there is no oscillation or abnor mal sound from the motor Check the monitor display to ensure that U1 03 Output Current is not too high Refer to page 4 11 Adjustment Suggestions if hunting vibration or other problems originated by the con trol system occur _ Check and Recording User Parameters Use verify mode i e when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator lights up to check user parameters that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user parameter table Any user parameters that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode If required the copy function parameters 03 01 and 03 02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator If changed set tings are saved in the Digital Operator they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system recovery if the inve
61. Inverter rated current is set as 100 Torque detec tion time Sets the overtorque undertorque detection time Cooling fan control delay time Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the inverter STOP command is given Monitor selec tion Set the number of the 3rd monitor item to be displayed in the Drive Mode U1 OD Not on LCD operator ter Num Description pd gu BUS ber 9 9 Register Sets the brightness on the optional LCD operator JVOP 160 OY 0 light 1 2 3 normal LCD Focus 4 5 dark ond Monitor Selects the monitor that is displayed and 6 locked in the second line of the operator E Selection display 3rd Monitor Selects the monitor that is displayed and 6 locked in the third line of the operator Selection display Clears or stores user initial values 0 Stores not set 1 Begins storing Records the set parameters as user initial values 2 clear Clears all recorded user ini tial values When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values 1110 will be set in 1 03 User parameter initial value When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor sets whether the Enter key is necessary or not 0 Enter key needed 1 Enter key not needed When set to 1 the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter key
62. L3 1 2 B2 is Eon U TL V T2 W T3 5 25 6 to 10 8 10 to 6 6 10 R LI S L2 T L3 41 2 B2 M5 25 E x 774015 U T1 V T2 W T3 8 to 6 8 M5 2 5 6 to 10 6 M6 4 0 to 5 0 10 to 6 10 R LI S L2 T L3 1 amp 2 U TI V T2 Mg 40050 10 to 35 10 W T3 8 to 2 8 E7Z4018 B1 B2 5 2 5 n i 8 8 10 to 16 10 M6 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 4 8 R LI S L2 T L3 1 93 U T1 V T2 Mg 40050 ie 7z4022 W T3 RULII 817 21 TV L31 6 to 4 6 16 to 25 16 M8 9 0 to 10 0 6 to 2 6 S L2 T L3 1 3 U TI V T2 M6 40 to 5 0 7 A E7z4030 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 4 4 25 to 35 25 M8 9 0 to 10 0 4 to2 D R L1 S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W M8 9 0 to 10 0 25 to 50 35 T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 4 to 1 0 2 E7Z4037 10 to 16 _ 3 M6 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 4 25 to 35 25 M8 9 0 to 10 0 4002 D Table 2 2 400 V Class Wire Sizes 7 j POSI Recom Inverter 5 Termi Tightening OSsibie mended Wire 5 Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Si 2 Wire Type CIMR O Screws N m mm AWG AWG S L2 T L3 1 U TI V T2 W M8 9 0 to 10 0 35 to 50 35 T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 2 to 1 0 2 E7Z4045 3 M6 40to50 s to 5 M8 90to10 0 a 0 gt a R LI S L2 T L2 41 U TI V T2 M8 9 0 to 10 0 50 50 W T3 RI L11
63. L31 300 9 600 300 22 s E7Z2110 1 0 x 4P p3 M8 8810108 10 to 2 0 150 150 x 2P M12 31 4 to 39 2 300 300 x 2P rl 2 M4 13tol4 0 te 10 Re The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C Table 2 2 400 V Class Wire Sizes Inverter Termi Tightening Possible UE Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Si 2 Wire Type CMRE Screws Nem mm AWG AWO S L2 T L3 7 1 42 B1 B2 mon U T1 V T2 W T3 5 to M 21915 141010 14 R LI S L2 T L2 1 42 B1 B2 d n U T1 V T2 W T3 5 to E7Z40P7 i M4 2to 1 5 14 to 10 14 R LI S L2 T L3 D 1 2 BI B2 bu 53 U TI V T2 W T3 5 to PEDE Ms 24015 141010 14 R LI S L2 T L3 1 2 B2 T U TI V T2 W T3 5 to Ma SEIS 14 S L2 T L3 7 1 42 B1 B2 RA 7743 7 V T2 W T3 T m 2 504 12 14 to 10 25 14 R LI S L2 T L3 41 2 B2 E7z44po U TI V T2 W T3 tu TE 2 5to4 12 14 to 10 73 14 R LI S L2 T L3 7 1 2 B1 B2 m E7zasps U TL V T2 W T3 M4 L2to1 5 12 to 10 12 2 5104 2 5 14 to 10 14 R LI S L2 T L3 1 2 B2 i d E7z47P5 V T2 W T3 M4 1 2 to 1 5 10 Power cables 4 4 e g 600 V vinyl 12 to 10 12 power cables R LI S L2 T
64. M1 M4 Function Selection Inverter Overheat Pre Alarm 20 If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output 1s switched ON when the heatsink temper ature exceeds the overheat pre alarm level set in L8 02 Input Phase Loss Detection Level For the Input Phase Loss Detection the drive monitors the DC bus ripple The drive integrates this AV value over 10 scans appr 10 seconds If the integrated AV value of any consecutive ten scan range is greater than the voltage determined by multiplying L8 06 times the drives rated OV Trip point 400Vdc 800Vdc a PF fault will occur and the Drive will coast to stop Phase Loss Fault Signal DC Bus Voltage K 10 seconds t ERelated Parameters Setting Description Allowed DC bus ripple before input phase loss is Input Phase Loss Detection detected in percent of the OV trip level Level 200V class 400 VDC 400V class 800 VDC Ground Fault Protection This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents Normally it should be 0 If the earth leakage current gets too high the inverter output will be switched off and a GF fault is shown on the display The fault contact is activated Related Parameters Peram Setting Factory Grange Access ter Num Name Description during Range Setting 3 Level ber Operation 1 5 09 Ground fault prote
65. Operation continues even if the Dig ital Operator is disconnected 1 Enabled OPR is detected at Digital Operator disconnection Inverter output is switched off and fault contact is operated Setting Range Factory Setting Cumulative operation time setting Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units Operation time is calculated from the set values Cumulative operation time selection 0 Cumulative time when the Inverter power is on All time while the Inverter power is on is accu mulated 1 Cumulative Inverter run time Only Inverter output time is accumulated Initialize Mode 2 Europe 5 PV E Spec Fan operation time setting Set the initial value of the fan operation time using hour units The operation time accumulates from the set value Fault trace initialize 0 Disable 1 Initialize zero clear after setting 1 02 12 will be returned to 0 Energy monitor initialize Resets the monitor parameter U1 29 and U1 30 back to zero 0 No change 1 Reset to zero E Monitor Selection 01 01 Using parameter o1 01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can be selected This function HAND key function selection If set to 0 the HAND button on the digital operator is disabled and the drive will not enter the HAND mode and start to run when the HAND button is pressed 0 HAND button disabled 1 HAND button enabled This functi
66. Port Termination Resistance Analog Input A2 Current Voltage Signal Selection LAC IL COCOCOR Fig 2 12 Standard terminal board Switch S1 function The settings of switch S1 is shown in the following table RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resis OFF No terminating resistance tance ON Terminating resistance of 110 0 to 10 V internal resistance 20 I 4 to 20 mA internal resistance 250 Input method for analog input A2 i Switch S1 and Jumper CN15 Optional Terminal Board An optional terminal board which supports switching the signal type of the analog outputs FM and AM between voltage and current is available The switch over can be performed using jumper CN15 The switch S1 has the same function like on the standard terminal board See Fi ig 2 13 for details E Analog Output FM Current Voltage Signal Selection Analog Output AM Current Voltage Signal Selection RS422 485 Port Termination Resistance u Analog Input A2 Current Voltage Signal Selection Fig 2 13 Optional terminal board Switch S1 and jumper CN15 function The settings of switch S1 and jumper CNI5 are described in the following table Function Setting RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resis OFF No terminating resistance tance ON Terminating resistance of 110 0 to 10 V internal resistance 20 I 4 to 20 mA internal resistance 250
67. S tasso E E Hi audere De denied 6 110 Displaying User set Parameters 6 111 Troubleshooting cea rera nave rcu o ces aoo 7 1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions eee 7 2 DF AUN SSC LEN si Los cte Ls Dat RU MIA LU Le Uu dict te 7 2 iit e dace aes itae meet 7 7 Operation ITO oer 7 9 Errors During Autotuning 7 10 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function 7 10 10 Troubleshoollg o oce tea Re ee do ng uuu if Parameters Cannot BB Set ios oe ahs eel tme e e Le if the Motor Does Not Operate If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is 7 14 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is 1 7 14 If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference 7 14 If Motor Deceleration is Slow ccccccccsecccsesscsesscnesccessecessecessecsssecssecesseesssecessessenessene 7 15 ifthe Motor Overheats uu metit Siret tenter s te dut eee ees 7 15 if peripheral devices like PLC s or other are influenced by the starting or running inverter
68. S4 Multi function digital input 2 function selection 5 Terminal S5 s Multi functi igital i t3 function selection ulti function digital inpu Terminal S6 Multi function digital input 4 function selection 5 Terminal S7 function selection Multi function digital input 5 The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence Multi function Digital Input Functions Setting Waite Function 3 wire sequence Forward Reverse Run command Local Remote selection ON Operator OFF Parameter b1 01 b1 02 setting Operation Source Option Card Inverter selection ON Option Card Multi step speed reference 1 When H3 09 is set to 2 this function is combined with the master auxiliary speed switch Multi step speed reference 2 Jog frequency command higher priority than multi step speed reference Acceleration Deceleration time selection 1 External baseblock NO NO contact Baseblock at ON External baseblock NC NC contact Baseblock at OFF Acceleration deceleration ramp hold ON Acceleration deceleration stopped frequency is hold Multi function analog input A2 disable enable ON Enable Not used Set when a terminal is not used Up command Always set with the Down command Down command Always set with the Up command FJOG command ON Forward run at jog frequency 41 17
69. Setting Factory during Access Range Setting Opera Level tion Description Sets whether or not frequencies will be recorded on hold command 0 Disabled when operation is stopped or the power is turned ON again the frequency refer ence is set to 0 Frequency reference hold 1 Enabled when operation is stopped or the function selection power is turned ON again the inverter starts at the previous hold frequency This function is available when the multi function inputs Accel Decel Ramp Hold or Up Down com mands are set E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set Valve A Accel Decel Ramp Hold i Time Chart The time chart when using Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below Power supply Forward Stop OFF ON ON Acceleration Deceleration OFF _ ON o Ramp Hold Ld Output frequency Hold Hold Fig 6 37 Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals UP DOWN The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multi function Digital Input terminal S3 to S7 To use this function set two of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function Digital Input terminal S3 to S7 function selection to 10 UP command and 11 DOWN comm
70. The PI soft starter function can also be disabled or enabled using a multifunction digital input H1 O0 has to be set to 34 6 89 Control Block The following diagram shows the PI control block in the Inverter 20 89 TEES jesyo Id 91 60 29 11 acp p CEP EIU ENS DT JenueJeyig Id c Id uen 19481 dN 1 91 60 H gouuow Id ves ienue eyid Id T aye 4 z OL 40 0 62 89 OL 0 i 1950 Id Id z 2n ZY leuw og sq 20 99 uopound 920005 LZ Gq uonosjes 91 60 cH 0 V 8z 9q 0 uonounj dea s 01 91 60 H 02 69 o lenueJeyid Id Y 9L 60 H GPs 2 11 p jenueJejlld Id pus 60 9q 0 XXx H LE XX H peed 90 99 yesoy 20 99 jeune indino Id uii Z 11 99 e j 0 oz AL leuopodoid y 092819 s _ i
71. The operation method setting is wrong If parameter b1 02 Operation Method Selection is set to 1 control circuit terminal the motor will not oper ate when the RUN key is pressed Either press the LOCAL REMOTE key to switch to Digital Operator oper ation or set b1 02 to 0 Digital Operator The LOCAL REMOTE key can be enabled or disabled by setting 02 01 It is enabled when the drive INFO mode is entered and 02 01 is set to 1 The frequency reference is too low If the frequency reference 15 set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Inverter will not operate Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency iThe motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input The following causes are possible The Inverter is not in drive mode If the Inverter is not in drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU key make the DRIVE indicator flash and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA ENTER key The DRIVE indica tor will light up when drive mode is entered The operation method selection is wrong If parameter b1 02 reference selection is set to 0 Digital Operator the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input Set b1 02 to 1 control circuit terminal and try again The motor will also not operate if the LOCAL REMOTE key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator operation In that case press the
72. Therefore parameter 02 03 has to be set to 1 To initialize the Inverter parameters using the user set initial values in memory set parameter A1 03 to 1110 To clear the user set initial values in memory set 02 03 to 2 i Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the Enter Key 02 05 This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator When 02 05 15 set to 1 you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the Enter key B Operation Selection when the Digital Operator is Disconnected 02 06 This function selects the operation when the digital operator gets disconnected when a RUN command is active If 02 06 is set to 0 the operation is continued If 02 06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop The fault contact is operated When the operator is reconnected an OPR Operator disconnected is shown i Cumulative Operation Time 02 07 and 02 08 The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively Using parameter 02 07 the cumulative operation time can be changed e g after a replacement of the control board If parameter 02 08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON If 02 08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only The factory setting is 0 il Cooling Fan Operation Time 02 10 This funct
73. Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter Turn ON the power supply Set the required communications parameters H5 01 to H5 08 using the Digital Operator Turn OFF the power supply and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared Turn ON the power supply once again Ge pae sp est Perform communications with the PLC 6 67 ERelated Parameters Reference source selection Description Sets the frequency reference input source 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Setting Range Factory Setting RUN command Source Selec tion Sets the run command input source 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal digital multifunction inputs 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Station address Sets the Inverter station address hex Baud rate selection Sets the baud rate for MEMOBUS communica tions 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Communications parity selec tion Sets the parity for MEMOBUS communications 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Communications error detec tion selection Sets the stopping method for communications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to a stop
74. a registered trademark of the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendors Association Inc nterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International Ltd LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echelon XVI Handling Inverters This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter Varispeed E7 Noui 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery uisi s HN QE VIA 1 4 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions esses 1 8 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 11 Installation Orientation and Space 1 12 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover 1 14 _ arispeed E7 Introduction Varispeed E7 Applications The Varispeed E7 15 ideal for the following applications Fan blower and pump applications 1 Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation Refer to page 4 1 Trial Operation Varispeed E7 Models The Varispeed E7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage classes 200 V and 400 V The maximum motor capacities vary from 0 55 to 300 kW 42 models Models Table 1 1 Varispeed E7 Models Specifications Maximum Always specify through the protective structure when ordering Motor Outp
75. access is not recorded anywhere With broadcast sending a start address other than 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets register content being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16 In write mode the number of data bytes in the message is not No of packets x 2 Data setting error Asimple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters When writing parameters the parameter setting is invalid Write mode error Attempting to write parameters to the inverter during operation Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation Attempting to write parameters other than A1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when warning alarm CPF03 defective EEPROM has occurred Attempting to write read only data Writing during DC bus undervoltage UV error Writing parameters to the inverter during UV DC bus undervoltage alarm Writing via ENTER commands during UV DC bus undervoltage alarm Writing error during parameters processing Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Inverter i Slave Not Responding In the following cases the slave will 1gnore the write function When a communications error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree When
76. agree 1 Frequency detection 1 or Fre quency detection 2 is set fora multi function output Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Speed agreement detection width Effective when fief fout agree 1 fout fset agree 1 or Frequency detection 1 or Frequency detec tion 2 is set for a multi function output Operation when frequency refer ence is missing 0 Stop Operation follows the fre quency reference 1 Operation continues at the fre quency set in parameter L4 06 Frequency reference loss means that the frequency reference value drops over 90 in 400 ms Frequency refer ence value at fre quency reference loss Fault Restart L5 Number of auto restart attempts Sets the frequency reference value when the frequency reference is missing Description Sets the number of auto restart attempts Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register Auto restart oper ation selection Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart 0 No output Fault contact is not activated 1 Output Fault contact is acti vated Fault Retry time Sets the maximum time the restart is tried i Torque Detection L6 MEMO BUS Register Setting Factory Desc
77. bm 3 10 D gt Autotuning MB casia attirer tete tut 3 11 4 Trial Operatioi Ev odas 4 1 Trial Operation Procedure sssssssssee e 4 2 Trial Operation oe tte iet cete rnt Ha tbe ert b vti adu 4 3 Application CODI iD o eet Der Lat urit ML dg aL uM ME 4 3 Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher 4 3 e Power scusate as i ec nad capi rU Sie 4 4 Checking the Display Status 1 aee rte e ete ese e lt 4 5 Basic Saldo en Or a BR ST SRE OA ROOT eee Set EU 4 5 Selecting the V f palris eae te acr At 4 7 el i Sk aa fect heat he SEE Se Ns 4 7 Application Seide estet ote tiet lone ote gea ese tenes 4 8 Nodoad Oparatigti ood lan eta oe Ege 4 9 Nica Operation e obest a Que pcena in nisse R A AEN T 4 9 Check and Recording User Parameters sse 4 10 Adjustment Suggestions etae icri o 4 11 5 User Parameters i rrire esu cec cota haya o eR e een Roni eR axRRRE 5 1 User Parameter Descriptions 5 2 Description of User Parameter Tables sssses 5 2 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels 5 3 User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode
78. control circuit terminal A2 When H3 09 Multi Function analog input terminal A2 function selection is set to 0 factory setting the input on A2 is added to Al Inverter Q V Power supply 15 V A1 Auxiliary frequency 20 O A2 Master frequency O AC Analog common DIP switch S1 Fig 6 6 Frequency Reference Using Current Setting Precautions When inputting a current signal to terminal A2 turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 factory setting ON f using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency reference set H3 13 Terminal A1 A2 Switching to 1 Using Multi Step Speed Operation With Varispeed E7 series Inverters you can change the speed to a maximum of 5 steps using 4 multi step fre quency references and one jog frequency reference The following example of a multi function input terminal function shows a 5 step operation using multi step references 1 and 2 and jog frequency selection functions Related Parameters To switch frequency references set multi step references 1 and 2 and the jog reference selection in the multi function digital inputs Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 04 Terminal Parameter Number Set Value Details Multi step speed command 1 Also used for master speed auxiliary speed switch ing when multi function analog input H3 09 is set to 2 auxiliary frequency refer ence Multi step spe
79. cooling fan power cable connector CN26 and CN27 from the gate driver positioned at the back of the controller Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter 5 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan use the above described procedure in reverse order to attach all of the com ponents When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the Inverter Controller bracket Connector Fig 8 2 Cooling Fan Replacement Inverters of 22 KW or More Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card iRemoving the Control Circuit Terminal Card 1 Remove the Digital Operator and front cover 2 Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card 3 Loosen the mounting screws 1 on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free It is not necessary to remove these screws completely They are self rising 4 Pull the terminal card out downwards in direction 2 E Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card Use the removal procedure in reverse order to mount the terminal card Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller card properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing into its plan The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced
80. frequency reference 0to 10 V 20kQ A2 Multi function analog input 1 T cT o 7 Default Frequency Bias 4 to 20 mA 250 V V ov ae o Analog input power supply 15 V 20 mA Terminating 22 resistance a R o P IR MEMOBUS communication S RS 485 422 S D i 3 Twisted pair P shlelded ites P shielded wires Fig 2 14 Control Circuit Terminal Connections MA Fault contact output LMB 250 VAC 1 A max MC 30 VDC 1 A max Contact output 1 1 M2 Default During run M3 1 Contact output 2 4 Default Zero speed Multi function digital output 250 VAC 1 A max 30 VDC 1 A max Multi function analog output 1 0 to 10 V 2 mA Default Output frequency 0 to 10 V Multi function analog output 2 0 to 10 V 2 mA Default Output current 0 to 10 V Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 and 3 and other high power lines Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA MB MC MI M2 M3 and M4 contact outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals If using an optional external power supply it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pa
81. func tion the inverter operation can be stopped on peripheral devices break down or other errors The digital opera tor will display EFx External error input terminal Sx The x in EFx shows the number of the terminal at which the external error signal is input For example if an external error signal is input to terminal S3 EF3 will be displayed To use the external error function set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection Select the value to be set in H1 01 to H1 05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions Signal input level from peripheral devices External error detection method Operation during external error detection The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1 OO Input Level 1 Error Detection Method 2 Operation During Error Detection Detection Deceler Coast to Emer Continue During ate to Stop Stop gency Stop Operation Operation Error Error Error Warning Continuous Detection Sets the input level at which errors are detected NO contact External error when ON NC contact External error when OFF N Set the detection method to detect errors using either continuous detection or detection during operation Continuous detection Detects while pow
82. function input command 6 BitA Multi function input command 7 Bits B to F Not used 0002H Frequency reference Set units using parameter 01 03 0003H to 0005H Not used 0006H PI target value 0007H Analog output setting 11 V 726 to 11 V 726 gt 10V 660 0008H Analog output 2 setting 11 V 726 to 11 V 726 gt 10V 660 Multi function contact output setting Bit 0 Contact output 1 Terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Contact output 2 Terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit2 Not used Bits 3 to 5 Not used Bit 6 Set error contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Error contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 8 to F Not used 000AH to 000EH Not used Note Write 0 to all unused bits Also do no Reference selection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Input PI target value 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bits 3 toB Not used Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled D E F Not used write data to reserved registers Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Monitor data can only be read Register No Contents Inverter status signal Bit 0 During run Bit 1 Zero speed
83. into place Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card Fig 8 3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card Always confirm that the charge indicator does not light anymore before removing or mounting the con INFO trol circuit terminal card opecifications This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and peripheral devices Standard Inverter Specifications 9 2 _ Standard Inverter Specifications The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables Specifications by Model Specifications are given by model in the following tables m200V Class Model Number CIMR E7Z O Max applicable motor output kw Rated output capacity kVA 32 44 Rated output current A Max output voltage 3 phase 200 220 230 or 240 VAC V Proportional to input voltage 31 45 58 71 85 115 Output Ratings Max output fre quency Hz 200 0 Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage 1094 159 fluctuation 10 15 Allowable frequency fluctuation B 5 A H o S o E a o E a amp 3 a o A Mea sures for power supply 12 pulse har rectifica Not possible Possible
84. names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 4 The Inverter with the ter minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1 5 Top protective cover Part of Enclosed Wall Front cover Mounting hole Digital Operator Diecast case Terminai cover Nameplate Bottom protective cover Fig 1 4 Inverter Appearance 18 5 kW or Less sw sc sP A v2 v ic va ve vc L Control circuit terminals EG sTs2 s3 sa ss se sz FM IG s S eco Main circuit terminals Charge indicator Ground terminal Fig 1 5 Terminal Arrangement 18 5 kW or Less B Inverters of 22 kW or The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 6 The Inverter with the ter minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1 7 Mounting holes Inverter cover Cooling fan Front cover Digital Operator MU o a 2 Nameplate 2 Terminal cover M Control e circuit terminals o Charge indicator circuit H terminals 2 1 RS Z ER I lt I A Ground terminal Fig 1 7 Terminal Arrangement 22 kW or More M Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Open Chassis Inverters IP00 Exterior diagrams of the Open Ch
85. not short the output wires Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit The high frequency components of the Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch Never connect an electromagnetic switch MC between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during operation If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating a large inrush current will be created and the inverter s overcurrent protection will operate When using a MC to switch for instance between two motors stop the Inverter output before operating the MC Installing a Thermal Overload Relay Contact for Motor Protection This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating If however more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi polar motor is used always install a thermal relay THR between the Inverter and the motor and set L1 01 to 0 no motor protection The control circuit should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit inputs Cable Length between Inverter and Motor If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long the high frequency leakage current will increase caus ing the Inverter output current to increase as well This may affect peripheral devices To prevent this adjust 2 the carrier f
86. of the parameter H2 01 and H2 02 multi function output terminals M1 M2 and M3 MA function selec tion The overtorque undertorque detection level is set as a current level taking the inverter rated output current as 100 ERelated Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting 0 Overtorque undertorque detection disabled Overtorque detection only with speed agree ment operation continues after overtorque warning is output Overtorque detected continuously during opera tion operation continues warning is output Overtorque detection only with speed agree ment output is stopped upon detection Overtorque detected continuously during opera Torque detection selection 1 tion output is stopped upon detection Undertorque detection only with speed agree ment operation continues warning is output Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues warning is out put Undertorque detection only with speed agree ment output is stopped upon detection Undertorque detected continuously during operation output is stopped upon detection Torque detection level 1 Inverter rated current is set as 10096 Torque detection time 1 Set the overtorque undertorque detection time Multi function Output H2 01 and H2 02 Set Value Function B Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NO NO contact Overtorque detection and
87. operation Frequency ref erence setting method selec tion 0 Cumulative time when the Inverter Cumulative power is on All time while the operation time Inverter power is on is accumulated selection 1 Cumulative Inverter run time Only Inverter output time is accumulated Read permis 0 READ prohibited sion selection 1 READ permitted The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity These are values for a 200 V class Inverter Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double After autotuning E1 13 will contain the same value as E1 05 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given The setting range is from 1096 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given Parameter is only effective if HOA operator with LCD JVOP 162 is used QUA amp M B User Parameter Tables A Setup Settings Initialize Mode A1 Param MEMO eter Description Setting Factory Access BUS Setting Level Register Used to select the language dis played on the Digital Operator JVOP 160 OY only 0 English 1 Japanese 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Portuguese This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation Language selec tion for Digital Operator display Used
88. output fre quency when 10 V is input Gain terminal Al Sets the frequency as a percent age of the maximum frequency when 0 V is input 0 0 to 10V 11 bit 2 4 to 20 mA 9 bit input 3 0 to 20 mA 9 bit input Bias terminal Al Multi function analog input ter minal A2 signal level selection Switch current and voltage input using the switch S1 on the control terminal board Multi function analog input ter minal A2 func tion selection Selects the multi function analog input function for terminal A2 Refer to the table on the next page Gain terminal A2 Sets the input level when terminal A2 input is 10 V 20 mA accord ing to the 100 value of the func tion set in parameter H3 09 100 0 ter Num Description Setting Facon BUS Range Setting 3 ber Register Sets the input level when terminal Bias terminal A2 is 0 V 4 mA 0 mA accord A2 ing to the 100 value of the func tion set in parameter H3 09 Sets primary delay filter time constant for the two analog input terminals A1 and A2 Effective for noise suppression etc Analog input fil ter time constant 0 Use terminal A1 analog input as main frequency reference 1 Use terminal A2 analog input as main frequency reference Effective when H3 09 is set to 2 Terminal A1 A2 switching H3 09 Settings Setting i
89. output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Output Ratings Max output frequency Hz 200 0 Max voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage fluc 0 _ 150 net 10 15 Allowable frequency fluctuation Power Supply Characteristics Mea DC reactor Built in sures for power supply harmon ics 12 phase qp rectification Possible Control Characteristics The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa standard motor When selecting the actual motor and Inverter be sure that the Inverter s rated current is higher than the motor s rated current 2 A transformer with dual star delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification Common Specifications Control Characteristics The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters Model Number CIMR E7Z O Control method Specification Sine wave PWM V f control Speed control range 1 40 Speed control accuracy 3 25 C 10 C Frequency control range 0 0to 200 0 Hz Frequency accuracy tem perature characteristics Digital references 0 01 10 C to 40 C Analog references 0 1 25 C 410 C Frequency setting resolu tion Digital references 0 01 Hz Analog refere
90. over load resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started 1 0 min Alarm operation selection during motor overheat ing Selects the operation when the input motor temperature thermis tor input exceeds the alarm detec tion level 1 17 V H3 09 must be set to E 0 Decelerate to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation on the Operator flashes Motor overheat ing operation selection Selects the operation when the motor temperature thermistor input exceeds the overheating detection level 2 34 V H3 09 must be set to E 0 Decelerate to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Motor tempera ture input filter time constant Sets H3 09 to E and sets the delay time constant for the motor temper ature thermistor input in seconds BPower Loss Ride Through L2 MEMO BUS Register Setting Factory Description Range Setting 0 Disabled DC bus undervoltage UV1 detection 1 Enabled Restarted when the power returns within the time set in L2 02 When L2 02 is exceeded DC bus undervoltage is detected Enabled while CPU is operat ing Restarts when power returns during control opera tions Does not detect DC bus undervoltage Momentary power loss detec tion Momentary Ride through time when Momen power loss ride t
91. resistance W km x wire length m x current A x 10 Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2 3 Wire the termi nals correctly for the desired purposes Table 2 3 Main Circuit Terminal Functions 200 V Class and 400 V Class Model CIMR E7ZLILILILI 200 V Class 400 V Class R LI S L2 T L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 R1 L11 SI L21 TI L31 2022 to 2110 4022 to 4300 Inverter outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 Purpose Terminal Symbol Main circuit power input DC bus terminals 1 C 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 DC reactor connection 1 b2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018 Braking Unit connection D3 2022 to 2110 4022 to 4300 Ground 20 4 to 2110 40 4 to 4300 Main Circuit Configurations The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations 200 V Class 400 V Class CIMR E7Z20P4 to 2018 CIMR E7Z40P4 to 4018 Control Control circuits circuits R L1 S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 Power Control Control supply circuits si circuits GH 1 1 RIL1 RIA E ur st RILA i 81121 C R1 L11 S121 T1 L31 tes T 2001200 200 200 Power Control 1200 2200 3 Control su
92. sleep function input value If this value falls below the sleep level b5 15 for a longer time than the sleep operation delay time b5 16 the inverter output will be stopped If the value comes back to a value higher than b5 15 for a time longer than b5 16 the inverter will resume operation PI output SFS input Sleep operation level b5 15 Sleep operation Sleep operation delay time delay time b5 16 Internal run command Operation Stopped Run command has been input Operation status output External run command Operating Fig 6 52 PI Sleep Time Chart The functionality of the Sleep function is also available with deactivated PI controller EPI Snooze Function By setting b5 21 to 2 the PI snooze function can be enabled This software observes the output frequency Softstarter output and the PI feedback value to turn the inverter ON and OFF automatically as the system requires Snooze Activation The inverter stops operation when the output frequency Softstarter output falls below the snooze level b5 22 for a longer time than the snooze delay time b5 23 and the feedback value is above the snooze feed back value in b5 27 Before stopping the inverter finally the PI setpoint is boosted up to temporarily over satisfy the load and thereby to avoid a short cycle ON and OFF switching of the inverter The boost level is set in parameter b5 25 and it is set as percentage of the PI setpoint value but the
93. terminal A1 Bias terminal A1 Multi function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection Multi function analog input terminal A2 function selection Gain terminal A2 Bias terminal A2 Analog input filter time constant Terminal A1 A2 switching Monitor selection terminal FM Gain terminal FM Bias terminal FM Monitor selection terminal AM Gain terminal AM Bias terminal AM Analog output 1 signal level selection Factory Setting Setting Analog output 2 signal level selection Station address Communications speed selection Communications parity selection Stopping method after communications error Communications error detection selection Send wait time RTS control ON OFF Communications Selection CE detection time Motor protection selection Motor protection time constant Alarm operation selection during motor overheating Motor overheating operation selection Motor temperature input filter time constant Momentary power loss detection Momentary power loss ride through time Min baseblock time Voltage recovery time Undervoltage detection level Stall prevention selection during acceleration Stall prevention level during acceleration Stall prevention selection during decel Stall prevention selection during running Stall pr
94. the following items during periodic maintenance Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection Confirm that the LED indicators on the front cover have all turned OFF and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspec tion Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock External terminals mounting bolts connec tors etc Inspection Are all screws and bolts tight Corrective Procedure Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Cooling fan Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours Replace the cooling fan Power elements Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the elements Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm Smoothing capacitor Are there any irregularities such as dis coloration or odour
95. the front cover using methods other a than those described above otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact P 2 Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover Imperfect IMPORTANT contact can result Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover Inverters of 22 kW For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce dures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover iRemoving the Digital Operator 1 Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less jo s Removing the Front Cover Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 16 Removing the Front Cover Model CIMR E7Z2022 Shown Above B Attaching the Front Cover After completing required work such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it 1 Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it 2 Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter B Attaching the Digi
96. ticularly th x The rated current is set too high Check the input data particularly the alarm motor rated current Displayed after autotuning has been completed Check the input data Check the capacity of the Inverter and motor Check the motor rated current Check the input data Check wiring and the machine Check the load Check the input data Check motor wiring If the motor is connected to the machine disconnect it Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following table An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an error code is being displayed the display will be cleared and 03 01 will be displayed The error contact output and alarm output will not be operated Display Meaning Digital Operator write protected Probable causes 03 01 was set to 1 to read parameters when the Digital Operator was write protected 03 02 0 Corrective Actions Set 03 02 to 1 to enable writing parameters into the Digital Opera tors memory Illegal read data The read data length does not agree The read data are incorrect Repeat the read Check the Digital Operator cable Replace the Digital Operator Illegal write status An attempted write of a parameter to the EEPROM of the Digital Opera tor failed
97. will overheat Reduce the load amount by lowering the load Also consider increasing the motor capacity EThe ambient temperature is too high The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to be within the acceptable ambient operat ing temperature range EThe withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient When the motor is connected to the Inverter output a surge is generated between the Inverter output and the motor coil Normally the maximum surge voltage is up to three times the Inverter s input power supply voltage i e 1 200 V for 400 V class Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is higher than the maximum surge voltage If peripheral devices like PLC s or other are influenced by the starting or running inverter If electrical noise is generated by Inverter perform the following countermeasures Change the Inverter s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency nstall an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter s power supply input nstall an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter s output Make sure that motor and inverter are grounded properly Separate main circuit wiring from control
98. 0 Not used Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 OPR Digital operator disconnected Bit 4 CE Memobus communications error Bit 5 CALL Communications on standby Bit 6 OLI Motor overload Bit 7 OL2 Inverter overload Bit 8toA Not used Bit B FBL PI feedback loss Bit C CALL Communications on standby Bit D UL3 Undertorque detection 1 Bit E Not used Bit F Not used Alarm Content 3 Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 OH3 Motor overheat pre alarm Bit 2 to F Not used Inverter status Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward operation Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1 Completed 2 Not completed Bit 3 Error 1 Error Bit 4 Data setting error 1 Error Bit 5 Multi function contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function contact output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Not used Bits 8 to F Not used 6 77 Register No Contents Error details Bit 0 Overcurrent OC Ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Inverter overload OL2 Bit 3 Inverter overheat OH1 OH2 Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PI feedback lost FbL Bit 7 External error
99. 0 Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices EN 60204 1 1997 12Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices Part 1 General Requirements 60204 1 1997 Please note Includes Corrigendum of September 1998 EN 61010 1 A2 1995Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment 950 1991 Al 1992 A2 1993 A3 1995 A4 1996 modified CE marking is carried out to EN 50178 using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appro priate installation instructions i Transportation and storage The instructions for transportation storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the tech nical data installation Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation The cooling air must flow in the specified direction The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position e g upright Maintain the specified clearances Protect the inverters against impermissible loads Components must not be bent nor insu lation clearances changed To avoid damage being caused by static electricity do not touch any electronic components or contacts iElectrical Connection Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regula tions Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations In particular follow the installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatib
100. 00 x 160 x 610 260 x 135 x 386 300 x 160 x 716 Class A 100m Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment EN61800 3 A11 general availability 1st environment Inverter Model Varispeed E7 CIMR E7Z20P4 CIMR E7Z20P7 CIMR E7Z21P5 CIMR E7Z22P2 CIMR E7Z23P7 CIMR E7Z25P5 CIMR E7Z27P5 CIMR E7Z2011 CIMR E7Z2015 CIMR E7Z2018 CIMR E7Z2022 CIMR E7Z2030 CIMR E7Z2037 CIMR E7Z2045 CIMR E7Z2055 CIMR E7Z2075 CIMR E7Z2090 CIMR E7Z2110 Type 3G3RV PFI2130 SE Line Filters 55011 Chane Class 18 1 3 A 100m A 100m 3G3RV PFI2160 SE A 100m te 3G3RV PFI2200 SE 3G3RV PFI3400 SE 3G3RV PFI3600 SE A 100 200 11 0 A 100 A 100 A 100 100 Dimensions WxDxH 141 x 45 x 330 141 x 46 x 330 141 x 46 x 330 206 x 60 x 355 236 x 80 x 408 90 x 180 x 366 120 x 170 x 451 130 x 240 x 610 300 x 160 x 564 260 x 135 x 386 Class A 100 ambient temperature 45 max XIII Binstallation inverters and EMC filters L1 L3 L2 PE Ground Bonds remove any paint Inverter Filter L1L3 UW P Cable Length as short as possible Metal Plate Motor cable Ground Bonds screened remove any paint XIV Registered Trademarks The following registered trademarks are used in this manual DeviceNet is
101. 04 to 0 MM M Adjusting Frequency References Adjusting Analog Frequency References The analog reference values can be adjusted using the gain and bias functions for the analog inputs Related Parameters parami Facto Access eter Description Setti ry Number Sung Frequency reference terminal Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maximum 0 0 to H3 02 1 input gain output frequency when 10V is input 1000 0 100 0 Yes m Frequency reference terminal Sets the frequency as a percentage ofthe maximum 1000 d H3 03 f iu to 0 0 Yes A input bias output frequency when OV is input 4100 0 0 0 to 10V 11 bit 7 i 7 2 4 to 20 mA 9 bit input Multi function analog A2 sig Bu H3 08 level selection 3 0 to 20 mA 9 bit input 0 2 3 2 No A Switch current and voltage input using the switch S1 on the control terminal board 13 09 Multi function analog A2 Selects the multi function analog input function for 0 to 16 0 No A function selection terminal A2 Sets the input level when terminal A2 input is 10V H3 10 Multi function analog A2 20mA according to the 100 value of the func 00 t 100 0 Yes A input gain 1000 0 tion set in parameter H3 09 A Sets the input level when terminal A2 input is 0V 100 0 H3 11 analog 2 4mA according to the 100 value of the function to 0 0 set in parameter H3 09 100 0
102. 10 V 100 feedback PI input volume PI input volume 10 V 100 PI input PI output volume PI control output 10 V 100 PI output PI setpoint PI setpoint 10 V 100 PI target PI feedback 2 Monitors the feedback 2 value when Differen tial PI is selected 10 V 100 PI feedback Multi Function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set Value Function 19 PI control disable ON PI control disabled 30 PI control integral reset reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PI control 31 PI control integral hold ON Integral hold 34 PI soft starter 35 PI input characteristics switch Multi Function Analog Input H3 09 Set Value Function B PI feedback PI target value PI feedback 2 EPI Control Methods There are four PI control methods Select the method by setting parameter b5 01 Set Value Control Method PI output becomes the Inverter output frequency PI output is added to the frequency reference as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency EPI Input Methods PI Target Value Input Methods 6 Select the PI control target value input method according to the setting in b1 01 Reference Selection Normally the frequency reference selected in b1 01 is the PI target value but you can also set the PI target value as shown in the following table PI Target Input Method Setting Conditions Set MEMOBUS bit 1
103. 2 The unit is set in 01 03 frequency uni Monitors the feedback value of the PI fdbk2 input when Differen tial PI is selected 3 6 s of reference setting and monitor 10V 100 feedback value 0 to 10V possible B Fault Trace 12 Param eter Number Current fault Description The content of the current fault Last fault The error content of the last fault Reference frequency at fault The reference frequency when the last fault occurred Output frequency at fault The output frequency when the last fault occurred Output current at fault The output current when the last fault occurred Output voltage reference at fault The output reference voltage when the last fault occurred DC bus voltage at fault The main current DC voltage when the last fault occurred Output power at fault The output power when the last fault occurred Input terminal status at fault The input terminal status when the last fault occurred The format is the same as for U1 10 Output terminal status at fault The output terminal status when the last fault occurred The format is the same as for U1 11 Operation status at fault The operating status when the last fault occurred The format is the same as for U1 12 Cumulative operation time at fault Note The following errors are not included in The operating time wh
104. 3 AC power supply Start using speed detected Set frequency reference Output frequency Output current Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time L2 03 b3 05 Note If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long operation may be the same as the search in case 1 Fig 6 30 Speed Search after Baseblock Calculated Speed Loss Time L2 03 il Current Detection Speed Search at Startup The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below Deceleration time set in b3 03 Run command Set frequency Maximum output reference frequency or set frequency Output frequency b3 02 Output current Minimum baseblock time Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time b3 05 L2 03 Fig 6 31 Speed Search at Startup Current Detection Speed Search after Short Baseblock during Power Loss Recovery etc Loss time shorter than minimum baseblock time AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency Output frequency before power loss Deceleration time F Set frequency setin b3 03 lt reference b3 02 speed search operating current Y Output current Me Minimum baseblock time L2 03 1 gt 4 6 2 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency immediately befo
105. 37 CIMR E7Z4045 404500 4045 CIMR E7Z4055 405500 4055 CIMR E7Z4075 407500 4075 CIMR E7Z4090 409000 4090 CIMR E7Z4110 411000 41101 CIMR E7Z4132 413200 4132 CIMR E7Z4160 416000 4160 CIMR E7Z4185 418500 CIMR E7Z4220 422000 CIMR E7Z4300 430000 Varispeed E7 Voltage Class 400 V class pc E Confirmations upon Delivery Checks Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered Table 1 2 Checks upon delivery Item Method Has the correct model of Inverter been deliv Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other dam Is the Inverter d di e d I ce Send ao age resulting from shipping Are any screws or other components loose Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness If you find any irregularities in the above items contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative immediately Nameplate Information There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter The nameplate shows the model number specifica tions lot number serial number and other information on the Inverter B Example Nameplate The following nameplate is an example f
106. 5 34 14 Reference Detection 5 35 L5 Fault Restart 5 35 Autotuning Mode L6 Torque Detection 5 36 L8 Hardware Protection 5 37 Automatically measures the linesto linia resistance N1 Hunting Prevention Function 5 38 N3 High slip Braking 5 38 ol Monitor Select 5 39 02 Multi function Selections 5 40 03 Copy Function 5 41 T Motor Autotuning 5 42 User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode The minimum user parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table These and all other user parameters are also displayed in advanced programming mode Language selec tion for Digital Operator dis play Description Used to select the language displayed on the Digital Operator JVOP 160 OY only 0 English 1 Japanese 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Portuguese This parameter is not changed by the ini tialize operation Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Reference source selection Sets the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card RUN command source selection Sets the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal digital multi function inputs 2 MEMOBUS communications 3
107. A Sets primary delay filter time constant for the two H3 12 Analog input filter time con analog input terminals A1 and A2 Effective for 0 00 to 0 00 s No A stant 2 00 noise control etc 0 Use terminal A1 analog input as main fre quency reference H3 13 Terminal A1 A2 switching 1 Use terminal A2 analog input as main fre 1 0 quency reference Effective when H3 09 is set to 2 E Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage or current signals analog input A2 only The input signal levels can be selected using H3 01 for the analog input A1 H3 08 for the analog input A2 Adjustments to the signals can be made using H3 02 Gain and H3 03 Bias if analog input A1 is selected to be the frequency reference input H3 10 Gain and H3 11 Bias if analog input A2 is selected to be the frequency reference input Refer to Fig 6 22 for adjusting the signal using the gain and bias functions Frequency reference Frequency reference H3 02 H4 HOMO Terminal A1 Terminal A2 input input voltage i voltage current oy OV 4 mA O mA 10 V 20 mA Terminal A1 input Terminal A2 input H3 03 H3 11 Fig 6 22 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs E Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input When parameter H3 09 is set to 0 Frequency Bias the frequency equivalent to t
108. Adjusts the value in 5 steps until the output 655 00 power becomes minimal 1 0 to Power detection filter time con Sets the time constant for output power detection 2000 stant Sets the limit value of the voltage control range during search operation Set to 0 to disable the search operation 100 is the motor rated voltage Search operation voltage limiter 0 to 100 The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the parameters 2 The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity E Adjusting Energy saving Control When the Energy Saving Function is activated the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference b8 04 Energy saving Coefficient is preset assuming that motor and inverter capacity are the same Adjust b8 04 in steps of 5 until the output power reaches its minimum The higher the energy saving coeffi cient the higher is the output voltage To improve the responsiveness when the load fluctuates reduce the power detection filter time constant b8 05 If b8 05 is set too small however the motor rotations may become unstable under light load condi tions Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics Conse quently the motor efficiency has to be controlled To have optimized efficiency the search operation var ies the output voltage Parameter b8 06 Search Op
109. B Ground clip Ground plate The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal Remove any coats of varnish and paint Ground the cable shields at both ends Ground the motor of the machine You can find further informations in the document EZZ006543 which can be ordered at Omron Yaskawa Motion Control XII Line Filters ERecommended Line Filters for Varispeed E7 Inverter Model Varispeed E7 CIMR E7Z40P4 CIMR E7Z40P7 CIMR E7Z41P5 CIMR E7Z42P2 CIMR E7Z43P7 CIMR E7Z44P0 CIMR E7Z45P5 CIMR E7Z47P5 CIMR E7Z4011 CIMR E7Z4015 CIMR E7Z4018 CIMR E7Z4022 CIMR E7Z4030 CIMR E7Z4037 CIMR E7Z4045 CIMR E7Z4055 CIMR E7Z4075 CIMR E7Z4090 CIMR E7Z4110 CIMR E7Z4132 CIMR E7Z4160 CIMR E7Z4185 CIMR E7Z4220 CIMR E7Z4300 3G3RV PFI3010 SE 3G3RV PFI3018 SE 3G3RV PFI3035 SE 3G3RV PFI3060 SE 3G3RV PFI3070 SE 3G3RV PFI3130 SE 3G3RV PFI3170 SE A 100m 3G3RV PFI3200 SE 3G3RV PFI3400 SE 3G3RV PFI3600 SE 3G3RV PFI3800 SE Line Filter Current gt n A 100 m A 100 m A 100 m 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 1 ies AR A 5 A t2 i u 18 5 an 31 0 Dimensions WxDxH 141 x 46 x 330 141 x 46 x 330 206 x 50 x 355 236 x 65 x 408 80 x 185 x 329 90 x 180 x 366 120 x 170 x 451 130 x 240 x 610 3
110. Bit 2 During reverse operation Bit 3 Reset signal active Bit 4 During speed agree Bit 5 Inverter ready Bit 6 Minor fault Bit 7 Major fault Bits 8 to F Not used Operator status Bit 0 During OPE alarm Bit 1 During fault Bit 2 Operator in programming mode Bit 3 4 00 JVOP 160 attached 01 JVOP 161 attached 11 PC connected Bit 5 to F Not used OPE Fault Number Not used Fault Content 1 Bit 0 PUF DC bus fuse blown Bit 1 UVI Bit2 UV2 Bit 3 UV3 Bit4 Not used Bit 5 GF Ground fault Bit 6 OC Over current Bit 7 OV DC bus over voltage Bit 8 OH Inverter heatsink overheat pre alarm Bit 9 OHI Inverter heatsink overheat Bit A OLI Motor overload Bit B OL2 Inverter overload Bit C OL3 Overtorque detection 1 Bit D Not used Bit E Not used Bit F Not used 6 75 Register No Contents Fault Content 2 Bit 0 EF3 External fault set on terminal S3 Bit 1 EF4 External fault set on terminal S4 Bit 2 EF5 External fault set on terminal S5 Bit 3 EF6 External fault set on terminal S6 Bit4 EF7 External fault set on terminal S7 Bit 5 Not used Bit6 Not used Bit7 Not used Bit 8 Not used Bit9 Not used Bit A PF Input phase loss Bit B LF Output open phase Bit C OH3 Motor overheat pre alarm PTC analog input Bit D OPR Digital operato
111. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting for detailed fault descriptions and for corrective actions BENTER Command When writing parameters to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications the parameters are temporarily stored in the parameter data area in the Inverter To enable these parameters the ENTER command must be used There are two types of ENTER commands ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM and ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM non volatile memory in the Inverter at the same time as enabling the data in RAM The following table shows the ENTER command data ENTER command data can only be written The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H Register No 0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM RAM is refreshed 0910H Parameter data are not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only SNP The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM is 100 000 Do not frequently execute P ENTER commands 0900H that write into EEPROM HECATANT The ENTER command registers are write only Consequently if these registers should be read out the register address will become invalid Error code 02H i Communications Error Codes The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes Error Code Contents Function code error A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the PLC Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting to
112. Control Circuit Terminals You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local 1 e Digital Operator and remote input method set in b1 01 and b1 02 If any input from H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection has been set to 1 local remote selection this input can be used to switch over between local and remote To set the frequency reference source and RUN command source to control circuit terminals set b1 01 and b1 02 to 1 m Related Parameters Param eter Number Reference selection Description Sets the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Access Level a INFO RUN command source selec tion Sets the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal digital multifunction inputs 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card You can also perform local remote switching using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the Digital Opera tor When the local remote function has been set for one external terminal the LOCAL REMOTE key function on the Digital Operator will be disabled Blocking the Inverter Output Baseblock Command Set 8 or 9 Baseblock command NO NC in one of the parameters H1 01 t
113. Description Set the frequency to be add to or subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a percent taking the maximum output frequency to be 100 Enabled when the increase speed command or decrease speed command is set for a multi func tion input Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Setting i Trim Control Increase Decrease Command and Frequency Reference The frequency references using Trim Control Increase Decrease command ON OFF operations are shown below Frequency Reference Trim Control Increase Com mand Terminal Set Frequency Set Frequency Reference Reference d4 02 d4 02 BApplication Precautions Trim Control Increase Decrease command is enabled when speed reference gt 0 and the speed reference source is an analog input A1 or A2 When the analog frequency reference value d4 02 lt 0 the frequency reference is set to 0 If only one of the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multi function Digital Input terminal operation error OPEO3 invalid multi function input selected will occur Hold Analog Frequency Using User set Timing When one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection 18 set to IE sample hold analog frequency command the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the termi
114. I target 2 Snooze Snooze Level Sets the frequency level at which the snooze operation starts as percentage of the max output frequency 0 to 100 Snooze Delay Time Sets a delay timer for the snooze function 0 to 3600 5 Wake Up Level Sets the feedback level at which the inverter wakes up from snooze operation 0 to 100 Setpoint Boost Sets the PI setpoint boost when the snooze mode is activated If it is reached once the output will be switched off The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint 0 to 100 Maximum Boost Time Sets the maximum time the boost operation is per formed 0 to 3600 5 Snooze feedback PI Snooze function will only be activated when the feedback value is above this parameter setting The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint PI Feedback Square Root Operation Enables or disables the square root operation for the PI feedback value 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PI Feedback Square Root Gain Sets the gain for the feedback when square root opera tion is enabled 0 to 2 00 PI Output Monitor Square Root Monitor Items 01 00 Parameter Number PI feedback value Selects whether the PI output monitor is shown as square root value or not 0 Disable 1 Enable Description Monitors the feedback value when PI control is used Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output
115. Inverter 2kQ a V Power supply 15 V 20 mA 2kQ 4 A1 Master frequency reference A2 Auxiliary frequency reference AC Analog Fig 6 4 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input 2 Step Switching Master Auxiliary If 2 step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies is performed input the master speed fre quency reference to control circuit terminal A1 and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2 When terminal S3 multi step speed command 1 is OFF terminal A1 input master speed frequency refer ence will be the Inverter frequency reference and when terminal S3 15 ON terminal A2 input auxiliary speed frequency reference will be the Inverter frequency reference Inverter S3 Multi step speed Master command 1 Auxiliary SN Digital input neutral V Power supply 15 V 20 mA A1 Master frequency 0to 10V reference 14 A2 Auxiliary frequency reference 2 kQ AC Analog common V OFF ON 1 DIP switch S1 2 Fig 6 5 Master Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input Setting Precautions When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2 turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 to switch to voltage input factory setting 1s ON Binputting Frequency Reference Using Current When b1 01 is set to 1 the frequency reference can be input from control circuit terminal A2 Input the current 4 to 20 mA in
116. Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices Set the carrier frequency low If leakage current from the Inverter is large Set the carrier frequency low f metallic noise from the motor is large Set the carrier frequency high The carrier frequency can be set to vary depending on the output frequency as shown in the following dia gram by setting C6 03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit C6 04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit and C6 05 Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Carrier Frequency C6 03 Output frequency x C6 05 x K C6 04 Output frequency E1 04 Max Output Frequency K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6 03 C6 03 2 10 0 kHz K 3 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 gt 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz gt C6 03 K 1 Fig 6 1 Carrier Frequency Gain Settings To fix the carrier frequency set C6 03 and C6 04 to the same value or set C6 05 to 0 An OPEII Data setting error will occur if the carrier frequency proportional gain C6 05 gt 6 and C6 03 C6 04 i Carrier Frequency and Current Derating The default carrier frequency for the Normal Duty 1 mode depends on the inverter capacity The overload capability is 12096 of the Normal Duty 1 rated current for 1 minute If the carrier frequency is set to a higher value than the factory setting the overload capability 1s reduced like shown in Fig 6 2 A 200V Class 37 to 90kW 200V Class 0 4 to 22kW 400V Class 75 to 110kW _ 400 Cla
117. LOCAL REMOTE key again to return to the original setting A The LOCAL REMOTE key can be enabled or disabled by setting 02 01 It is enabled when the INFO drive mode is entered and 02 01 is set to 1 3 wire control is enabled The input method for a 3 wire control is different than when operating by forward stop and reverse stop 2 wire control If a 3 wire control is selected the motor will not operate when a wiring that is suitable for 2 wire control is used When using a 3 wire control refer to the wiring example and timing chart on page 6 9 Per forming Operations Using 3 Wire Control and input the proper signals When using a 2 wire control set the multi function input terminal H1 01 through H1 05 terminals S3 to S7 to a value other than 0 The frequency reference is too low If the frequency reference 15 set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Inverter will not operate Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency i The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected The load may be too heavy The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost func tion but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load Also consider increasing the motor capacity BThe motor rotates in one direction only Re
118. Lo valle Function Contents 100 Frequency bias Maximum output frequency Auxiliary frequency reference is used as frequency reference 2 Maximum output frequency PI feedback Maximum output frequency Frequency Bias 2 Maximum output frequency Motor temperature input PI differential mode Maximum output frequency Analog input not used E Multi function Analog Outputs H4 Monitor selec tion terminal FM Description Sets the number of the monitor item to be output U1 LIL1 at ter minal FM Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Gain terminal FM Sets the multi function analog out put 1 terminal FM gain Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 10V output at terminal FM Note that the maxi mum output voltage is 10V Bias terminal FM Sets the multi function analog out put 1 terminal FM bias Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to output at terminal FM The maximum output from the ter minal is 10 V Monitor selec tion terminal AM Sets the number of the monitor item to be output U1 LIL1 at ter minal AM Gain terminal AM Set the multi function analog out put 2 terminal AM gain Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 10V output at terminal AM Note that the maxi mum output voltage is 10V Bias terminal AM Sets the multi funct
119. Manual No YEG TOE S616 56 1 0Y gt VARISPEED E7 Variable Torque Frequency Inverter USER S MANUAL VARR RE Table of Content ce RU VII Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use VIII EMC Compatibility i ic e repere be ee Pee a X e ttt e reete ts ate tias eter XII Registered 2 nenne dehinc XV Handling Inverters 22 avouer arecraa saa eO s aAA 1 1 Varispeed E7 Introduction 1 2 Varispeed E7 Applications tette 1 2 MOodels u nr etm EU ale at Ely 12 Confirmations upon Delivery e 1 4 Checks iranin esperto E Leno eR UL EM a 14 Nameplate Information sume etur Lot i alse et te 1 4 Component Names 1 6 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 1 8 Open Chassis Inverters IPOO ccccsssssssecsssessssesscsescosssseressesessesesserescesescenescenessene 1 8 Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA1 ccccccsscssssesseseeeseeesesesestesesteseateeeateseenees 1 9 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 11 aicaele e eR cce Nth End Eus 1 11 Controlling
120. NE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Fig 3 7 Operations in Verify Mode Autotuning Mode Autotuning automatically measures and sets the motor line to line resistance of the motor and motor cable to compensate the voltage drop and thereby to achieve the best performance BExample of Operation Set the motor rated output power in kW and the motor rated current specified on the motor nameplate and then press the RUN key The motor is automatically run and the line to line resistance is measured Parameters can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys to change the setting The user parameter will be written and the display will be returned to monitor display when the DATA ENTER key 15 pressed The following example shows the autotuning procedure Autotuning Monitor Display Setting Display Autotuning Motor output power Motor output power DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Motor rated current Motor rated current 21 WEEE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Autotuning start Autotuning Stop command input RUN DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Fig 3 8 Operation in Autotuning Mode Y If a fault occurs during autotuning refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting IMPORTANT 3 12 Trial Operation This chapter describes the procedures for trial operati
121. OFF ON Deceleration time g C1 02 Output frequency eg Inverter output voltage interrupted 5 TN Mini baseblock Operation wait time T time L2 03 9e Output frequency at stop command input Minimum output frequency 10096 Maximum output frequency Fig 6 15 Coast to Stop with Timer Using the DC Injection Brake Set parameter b2 03 to apply DC injection to the motor before it starts to accelerate Applying DC injection at start will stop the motor before starting if it was coasting through inertia or wind mill effect Set b2 03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start Set parameter b2 04 to apply a DC injection brake to the motor at stopping It prevents the motor from coast ing when it would not be stopped completely using the normal deceleration This can occur if the inertia 15 very high The DC injection brake can be disabled by setting b2 04 to 0 Set the DC injection brake current using b2 02 Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level Used to set the frequency at which DC injection braking starts in units of Hz when b1 03 is set to 0 deceleration to stop When b2 01 is less than E1 09 E1 09 becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency DC injection braking starting frequency Set the DC Injection Braking Current as a percent DC injection braking current age of the Inverter rated current Used to se
122. PTC Thermistor Inputs This function provides a motor overheating protection using a thermistor PTC characteristic Positive Tem perature Coefficient that is built into the windings of each motor phase Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting Selects the operation when the input motor temper ature thermistor input exceeds the alarm detection level 1 17 V 0 Decelerate to stop Alarm operation selection 1 Coast to stop during motor overheating 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation 0H3 on the Digital Opera tor flashes Selects the operation when the motor temperature thermistor input exceeds the operation detection level 2 34 V Motor overheating operation 0 Decelerate to stop selection 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Motor temperature input filter Sets the delay time constant for the motor tempera time constant ture thermistor input in seconds EPTC Thermistor Characteristics The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value Class F Class H Resistance Ohms dote 1330 Temperature threshold value 550 ERR Mp Temperatue Va Tr Tr 5 Tr Tre5 Fig 6 26 PTC Thermistor Temperature Resistance Value Characteristics The shown resistance value is for one
123. Parameter Tables Change during Operation _ d User Parameter Descriptions This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables Description of User Parameter Tables User parameter tables are structured as shown below Here b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is used as an example Setting Factory Description Range Setting Sets the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal ana log input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Reference selec tion Parameter Number The number of the user parameter Name The name of the user parameter Description Details on the function or settings of the user parameter Setting Range The setting range for the user parameter Factory Setting The default setting of the user parameter Indicates whether or not the parameter can be changed while the Inverter is in operation Yes Changes are possible during operation No Changes are not possible during operation Indicates the parameter access level in which the parameter can be Access Level changed or monitored Q Quick programming mode and advanced programming mode A Advanced programming mode only MEMOBUS Register The register number used for MEMOBUS communications Page Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter _ E Digital Operat
124. RIFY A TUNE Verify Mode When returning from a setting display the most right digit of the monitor display will flash DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Autotuning If a user parameter is changed Mode the number will be displayed UJ e e e e DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Mode Selection Displays Monitor Displays Setting Displays XX Lightup Blinking Not light up Fig 3 3 Mode Transitions Drive Mode The Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated The following monitor displays are possi ble in drive mode The frequency reference output frequency output current and output voltage as well as fault information and the fault history When b1 01 Reference selection is set to 0 the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display using the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys The user parameter will be written and the display returns to the monitor display when the DATA ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting iExample Operations Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection Display Monitor Parameter DisplayDeleted Monitor Parameter Monitor Display MENU Display Frequency reference setting
125. Sets the Inverter s minimum baseblock time when the inverter is restarted after power loss ride through Set the time to approximately 0 7 times the motor time constant If an overcurrent or undercurrent occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking increase the set values Voltage recovery time Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum voltage Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW Multi function Digital Inputs Ser Value External search command 1 OFF Speed search disabled Start from lowest output frequency ON Speed calculation Calculates the motor speed and starts search from calculated speed Current detection Starts speed search from maximum output frequency external search command 1 Current detection Starts speed search from set frequency reference frequency when search command was input External seach command 3 OFF Inverter is base blocked External search command 2 OFF Speed search disabled Start from lowest output frequency 62 ON Speed calculation Calculates the motor speed and starts search from calculated speed Same operation as ON Inverter starts operation using speed search same operation as speed search 2 i Setting Precautions When both ex
126. ain circuit DC voltage Usually changing this setting is not necessary Undervoltage UV detection level Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW 2 These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter For a 400 V Class Inverter double the values li Setting Precautions Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored make settings so that RUN commands from the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended f the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 Disabled an alarm UV1 main circuit under voltage will be detected when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation 6 37 Speed Search The speed search function finds the actual speed of a motor that 1s coasting without control and then starts smoothly from that speed It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2 01 is set to enabled Related Parameters Speed search selection cur rent detection or speed calcu lation Description Enables disables the speed search function for the RUN command and sets the speed search method 0 Disabled speed calculation 1 Enabled speed calculation 2 Disabled current detection 3 Enabled current detection Speed Calculation When the search is started the motor
127. ain setting is wrong The frequency reference bias or gain set in parameter H3 03 or H3 02 influence the frequency reference Check to be sure that these set values are suitable signal is being input to the multifunction analog input terminal A2 When 0 frequency bias is set for parameter H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage current is added to the frequency ref erence Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable If Motor Deceleration is Slow B The deceleration time is long even when a braking option is connected The following causes are possible Stall prevention during deceleration enabled is set When a braking option is connected set parameter L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration to 0 disabled When this parameter is set to 1 enabled the braking option does not fully work The deceleration time setting is too long Check the deceleration time setting parameters C1 02 and C1 04 Motor torque is insufficient If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault maybe then the motor s power limit is reached Consider increasing the motor capacity If the Motor Overheats The load is too heavy If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used continuously with a torque that exceeds the motor s rated T torque the motor
128. alog output signals Multi function analog output frequency output 0 to 10 V 10 100 output frequency Multi function analog output 1 Analog common Multi function analog output current monitor 0 to 10 V 10V 200 of the Inverter rated current Multi function analog output 2 0 to 10 V max 4 2 mA max MEMOBUS communications input MEMOBUS communications output For 2 wire RS 485 short R and S as well as R and S Differential input PHC isolation Differential input PHC isolation Signal common 1 The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7 For a 3 wire sequence the default settings are a 3 wire sequence for S5 multi step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi step speed setting 2 for S7 2 Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment 3 When driving a reactive load such as a relay coil with DC power supply always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2 41 Flywheel diode oN o The rating of the flywheel diode 1 1 External power Col must be at least as high as the cir 1 1 1 30 VDC max cuit voltage Fig 2 11 Flywheel Diode Connection Switch S1 Standard Terminal Board The Switch S1 can be used to terminate the internal RS422 485 port and for selecting the input signal type for analog input Al See Fig 2 2 for details RS422 485
129. and Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the UP and DOWN commands are used as a pair Otherwise an alarm will be displayed The table below shows the possible combinations of the UP and DOWN command and the corresponding operation N ON Up command Down command OFF ON ON OFF The change of the output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration times Be sure to set b1 02 Run command selection to 1 Control circuit terminal ERelated Parameters Setting Factory Description Range Setting Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a per Frequency reference upper cent taking the maximum output frequency to be limit 100 Frequency reference lower Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a per limit centage of the maximum output frequency Sets the master speed frequency reference lower limit as a percent taking the maximum output fre quency to be 100 Master speed reference lower limit iPrecautions Setting Precautions If multi function input terminals S3 to S7 are set as follows operation error Invalid multi function input selection will occur Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set UP DOWN commands and Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time Application Precautions Frequency outputs using UP DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and
130. are stored until an error reset is input you can also reset while the Unit is operating 6 79 6 80 Broadcast Data Using broadcast data a command can be given to all slaves at the same time The slave address in the com mand message must be set to 00H slaves will receive the message They will not respond The following table shows the broadcast data You can also write this data Register Address Operation signal Contents Bit 0 Run command 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bits 2 and 3 Not used Bit 4 External error 1 Error Bit 5 Error reset 1 Reset command Bits 6 to B Not used Bit C Multi function digital input terminal S5 input BitD Multi function digital input terminal S6 input Bit E Multi function digital input terminal S7 input BitF Not used Frequency reference Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously Binverter Error Codes The content of a current fault and faults that have occurred earlier can be read out by Memobus using the Fault Trace U2 L1L1 and the Fault History U3 O10 parameters The fault codes are shown in the table below Fault Description Fault Description Fault Description PUF EF5 FBL UVI EF6 UL3 UV2 UV3 GF OC Refer to
131. arter SFS 1 Frequency reference PI target 2 Snooze Snooze Level Sets the frequency level at which the snooze operation starts as per centage of the max output fre quency Snooze Delay Time Sets a delay timer for the snooze function Wake Up Level Description Sets the feedback level at which the inverter wakes up from snooze operation Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Setpoint Boost Sets the PI setpoint boost when the snooze mode is activated If it is reached once the output will be switched off The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint Maximum Boost Time Sets the maximum time the boost operation is performed Snooze feedback PI Snooze function will only be activated when the feedback value is above this parameter setting The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint PI Feedback Square Root Operation Enables or disables the square root operation for the PI feedback value 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PI Feedback Square Root Gain Sets the gain for the feedback when square root operation is enabled PI Output Moni tor Square Root mEnergy Saving b8 Param eter Number Energy saving mode selection Selects whether the PI output mon itor is shown as square root value or not 0 Disable 1 Enable Description Select whether to enable or disable energy saving control 0
132. ary Power Loss Selection L2 01 through time is set to 1 in units of seconds Sets the Inverter s minimum base block time when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ride through Min baseblock Set the time to approximately 0 7 time times the motor time constant When an over current or overvolt age occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking increase the set values Sets the time required to return the Voltage recovery Inverter output voltage from to time normal voltage at the completion of a speed search Sets the main circuit undervoltage UV detection level main circuit DC voltage Usually changing this setting is not necessary Undervoltage detection level 1 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 These are values for a 200 V class Inverter Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double E Stall Prevention L3 Stall prevention selection during accel Description 0 Disabled Acceleration as set With a heavy load the motor may stall Enabled Acceleration stopped when L3 02 level is exceeded Acceleration starts again when the current has fallen below the stall prevention level Intelligent acceleration mode Using the L3 02 level as a basis acceleration is automati cally adjusted Set acceleration time 1s disregarded Setting Range Fac
133. assis Inverters are shown below w1 4 d a W1 4d z 7 Ha E m M t spe 4 N QN w D1 I i _ D1 3 D 5 _ 5 5 D 200 V 400 V Class Inverters of 0 55 to 18 5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 110 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW Wi W2 6 d E a 1 g o la RE i I gt 1 oo 1 T zig Wi DI 15 W OS 5 D 400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW Fig 1 8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA1 Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA1 are shown below WI ae OO WwW 4d iE eem 1 3 D Grommet 200 V 400 V Class Inverters of 0 55 to 18 5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 75 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW Fig 1 9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters Open Chassis IP00 Dimensions mm Enclosed Table 1 3 Inverter Dimensions mm and Masses kg of E7 inverters from 0 4 to 160kW Caloric Value Wall mounted NEMA1 Total Exter Inter
134. at if the DC injection braking current or braking time is set to a too large value Acceleration Deceleration Times The motor s acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor the load torque and the load s inertial moment GD 4 If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera tion or deceleration it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter Handling Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter BWiring Check The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U V or W Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power Check all wiring and control sequences carefully E Magnetic Contactor Installation Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line Doing so can cause the Inverter to malfunction Do not turn the inverter power supply ON and OFF more than one time every 30 minutes E Maintenance and Inspections After turning OFF the main circuit power supply always confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out before performing maintenance or inspections The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock I Motor Application Precautions
135. ation selection when digital operator is disconnected Cumulative operation time setting Cumulative operation time selection Initialize mode Fan operation time setting Fault trace initialisation Energy monitor initialize HAND key function selection Copy function selection Read permission selection Motor output power OQ Motor rated current Initial setting depends on Inverter capacity Setting for 200 V class Inverters For 400 V class Inverters double the value The contents is ignored if the setting is 0 0 E1 13 will have the same value as E1 05 after autotuning Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3 wire sequence Parameter is only effective if HOA operator with LCD JVOP 162 is used
136. ations Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display MENU Quick Programming Mode DRIVE Quick RDY VERIFY C1 01 Acceleration time 1 d1 01 Frequency reference 1 E1 01 Input voltage setting C1 02 Deceleration time 1 d1 02 Frequency reference 2 E1 03 V f pattern selection C6 02 Carrier frequency d1 03 Frequency reference 3 E1 04 Max output frequency selection d1 04 Frequency reference 4 E1 05 Max voltage d1 17 Jog frequency reference 1 06 Base frequency E1 09 Min output frequency E2 01 Motor rated current e gt DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Fig 3 5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode 3 8 Advanced Programming Mode In advanced programming mode all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set Parameters can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys to change the parameter The user parameter will be written and the display will return to monitor display when the DATA ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting Refer to Chapter 5 User Parameters for details on the parameters BExample Operations Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection Display Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display Advanc
137. ator display 160 Al 01 Parameter access level 1 03 Initialize 1 04 Password 1 05 Password setting A2 01 to A2 32 User setting parameters 1 01 Reference source selection 1 02 RUN command source selection b1 03 Stopping method selection b1 07 Operation selection after switching to remote mode 1 0 b1 04 Prohibition of reverse operation 0 0 0 61 08 Run command selection in programming modes bl 11 RUN delay 05 1 12 HAND Fref Source 0 b2 01 Zero speed level DC injection braking starting frequency 0 5 Hz b2 02 DC injection braking current 50 b2 03 DC injection braking time at start 0 00 s b2 04 DC injection braking time at stop 0 50 s b2 09 Motor pre heat current 0 b3 01 Speed search selection 2 b3 02 Speed search operating current 120 b3 03 Speed search deceleration time 2 0s b3 05 Speed search wait time 0 25 b3 14 Bi directional speed search selection 1 b4 01 Timer function ON delay time 0 0 s b4 02 Timer function OFF delay time 0 0s b5 01 PI control mode selection 0 b5 02 Proportional gain P 1 00 b5 03 Integral time l 0s b5 04 Integral T limit 100 0 b5 06 limit 100 0 b5 07 PI offset adjustment 0 0 b5 08 PI delay time constant 0 00 s b5 09 output characteristics selection 0 b5 10 Pl output gain
138. ayed and locked in the second line of the operator display 3rd Monitor Selection Selects the monitor that is dis played and locked in the third line of the operator display LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable E Multi function Selections o2 Description Sets the Digital Operator Local Remote key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Switches between the Digital Operator and the param eter settings b1 01 b1 02 Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register STOP key during control circuit terminal opera tion Sets the Stop key in the run mode 0 Disabled When the run com mand is issued from an external terminal the Stop key is disa bled 1 Enabled Effective even during run User parameter initial value Clears or stores user initial values 0 Stores not set 1 Begins storing Records the set parameters as user initial val ues 2 All clear Clears all recorded user initial values When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values 1110 will be set in 1 03 kVA selection Do not set unless using a control board from an Inverter with a dif ferent capacity Frequency refer ence setting method selection When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator fre quency reference monitor sets whether the Enter key is necessary or not 0 Enter key needed 1 Enter key not needed When set to 1 the Inverter accepts the frequ
139. b1 04 Selection of PI feedback sig nal loss detection 0 No detection of PI feedback loss 1 Detection of PI feedback loss Operation continues during detection the fault con tact is not operated 2 Detection of PI feedback loss The motor coasts to stop at detection and the fault contact operates PI feedback loss detection level Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as percentage using the maximum output frequency as 100 PI feedback loss detection time Sets the PI feedback loss detection time Sleep function operation level Sets the sleep function start level as a frequency Sleep operation delay time Sets the delay time until the sleep function starts Accel decel time for PI refer ence Sets the accel decel time for the PI Softstarter SFS PI Setpoint Selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PI Setpoint PI target value 6 86 PI Setpoint Scaling Description Sets the unit for b5 19 U1 38 and U1 24 0 0 01 Hz 1 0 01 the maximum output frequency E1 04 is taken as 100 2 39 rpm set value is equal to motor poles 40 39999 User desired display 4 Sets the display value for 100 Sets the number of decimal digits Factory Setting Sleep Function Selection Sets the operation method of the PI sleep function 0 Output frequency before Softstarter SFS 1 Frequency reference P
140. bient temperature is too high Install a cooling unit There is a heat source nearby Remove the heat source The Inverter s cooling fan has stopped Inverter s Cooling Fan Stopped The Inverter s internal cooling fan has stopped 200V 37kW and 400 75kW or bigger Replace the cooling fan Contact your sales representative Motor Overheating Alarm The Inverter will stop or will con tinue to operate according to the setting of L1 03 The motor has overheated Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the motor temperature input at terminal A2 Motor Overheating Fault The Inverter will stop according to the setting of L1 04 The motor has overheated Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the motor temperature input at terminal A2 Display Meaning Motor Overload The motor overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value Probable Causes The load is too heavy The accelera tion time deceleration time and cycle time are too short Corrective Actions Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times The V f characteristics voltage is too high or too low Check the V f
141. bsolute speed agreement level is set i e a speed agreement is detected in both directions FWD and REV E Multifunction Output Settings H2 01 to H2 02 M1 M4 function selection The table below shows the necessary H2 01 and H2 02 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement functions Set Value Function fret four Agree 1 fout Agree 1 Frequency detection 1 Frequency detection 2 i Time Charts The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions L4 01 Speed Agree Level L4 02 Speed Agree Width fief four Agree 1 Freq Ref Output Frequency fret x fout Agree Freq Ref 04 02 fer fau Agree OFF Multi function output setting 2 fout Agree 1 set ON at the following conditions during frequency agree L4 02 Output Frequency fout fset Agree four fer Agree 1 on OFF Multi function output setting 3 Frequency FOUT Detection 1 14 01 gt Output frequency Output Frequency Freq Detection 1 ON OFF Multi function output setting 7 4 Frequency Detec tion Frequency FOUT Detection 2 L4 01 Output frequency L4 02 Output Frequency L4 01 14402 Freq Detection 2 OFF Multi function output setting 5 MM M Improved Operating Efficiency This section explains func
142. can however read the parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting Used to set the parameter access level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and A1 04 1 Used to select user parameter Only parameters set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be read and set 2 ADVANCED Parameters can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced program ming mode Parameter access level Setting a Password When a password is set in A1 05 and if the set values A1 04 and A1 05 do not match you cannot modify the settings of parameters A1 01 to A1 03 or A2 01 to A2 32 You can prohibit the setting of all parameters except A1 00 by using the password function in combination with setting A1 01 to 0 Monitor only Related Parameters Setting Factory Range Setting Description Used to set the parameter access level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and A1 04 1 Used to select user parameter Only parameters set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be read and set 2 ADVANCED Parameters can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced program ming mode Parameter access level Password input when a password has been set in 1 05 This function write protects parameters of the ini Password tialize mode If the password is changed A1 01 to A1 03 and A2 01 to A2 32 paramet
143. cations cS wh ea a 9 4 cU 10 1 Inverter Application Precautions 10 2 es eae ee te 10 2 instalation sac iacit t Rn ad eec sri 10 3 ers eto oe den i LO pedo ede mue nde Ec te 10 3 Handige s etos eiaa ti Aes t vetas 10 4 Motor Application Precautions 10 5 Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor sss 10 5 Using the Inverter for Special Motors 10 5 Power Transmission Mechanism Speed Reducers Belts and Chains 10 6 User Paramiete rs cnc asc e eoe ete pede e dE de uda 10 7 Y arnings Cables must not be connected or disconnected nor signal tests carried out while the power is switched on The Varispeed DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off To avoid an electric shock hazard disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out maintenance Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the Varispeed The frequency inverter con tains semiconductors which are not designed for such high voltages Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on The printed circ
144. ce loss means that the frequency reference drops over 90 in 400 ms Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level Output frequency adjustment after freq reference loss If L4 05 is set to 1 and the reference is lost inverter will run at fout L4 06 fref before loss Restarting Operation After Transient Error Auto Restart Function If an Inverter error occurs during operation the Inverter will perform self diagnosis If no error is detected the Inverter will automatically restart This is called the auto restart function The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors OC Overcurrent PF Main circuit voltage fault GF Ground fault OLI Motor overload PUF DC bus fuse blown OL2 Inverter overload OV Main circuit overvoltage OHI Motor overheat UVI Main Circuit Undervoltage Main Circuit MC Operation Failure OL3 Overtorque When 12 01 is set to 1 or 2 continue operation during momentary power loss If an error that is not listed above occurs the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will not work The number of auto restarts is set in parameter L5 01 If a fault occurs the inverter performs the auto restart corresponding to Fig 6 34 The inverter tries to restart every 5 ms for the maximum time of L5 03 All retries performed during L5 03 are regarded as one restart attempt The internal counting of r
145. celeration start and at acceleration end For deceleration start and end the S curve times are fixed to 0 2 sec Q When S curve is set calculate acceleration deceleration time as follows Accel Time ate C1 01 03 05 07 INFO Decel Time 0 2 s C1 02 04 Setting Example The S curve characteristic when switching operation forward reverse is shown in the following diagram Forward Reverse Output frequency C2 02 Fig 6 18 S curve Characteristic during Operation Switching Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied to the motor or sudden rapid acceleration is performed If you set L3 01 to 1 enabled and the Inverter output current reaches 85 of the set value in L3 02 the acceleration rate will begin to slow down When L3 02 is exceeded the acceleration will stop If you set L3 01 to 2 optimum adjustment the motor accelerates so that the current is held at a level of 50 96 of the inverter rated current With this setting the acceleration time setting 15 ignored Related Parameters Change Factory during Access Setting Opera Level tion Param eter Description Number 0 Disabled Accelerates according to the setting Motor may stall if the load is too high 1 Enabled Acceleration stops when the level
146. ch command 3 65 Kinetic energy buffering deceleration at momentary power loss command NC contact 66 Kinetic energy buffering deceleration at momentary power loss command NO contact 67 Communications test mode 68 High slip braking HSB 69 Jog Frequency 2 6A Drive enable NC ON Drive enabled OFF Drive disabled 6B Operation Source Communication Inverter selection ON RS 422 485 port 6C Operation Source Communication Inverter selection 2 ON inverter settings AUTO mode selection ON AUTO mode active HAND mode selection ON HAND mode active Bypass Drive Enable This parameter is effective only if the HOA operator JVOP 162 is used B Multi function Contact Outputs H2 MEMO BUS Register Setting Factory Description Range Setting Terminal M1 M2 Multi function contact function selection output 1 Terminal M3 M4 Multi function contact function selection output 2 Multi function Contact Output Functions Setting Valle Function During run ON run command is ON or voltage is being output Zero speed fief four agree 1 detection width L4 02 is used fre agree 1 ON Output frequency L4 01 with detection width L4 02 used and during frequency agree Frequency detection 1 ON L4 01 gt output frequency L4 01 with detection width 14 02 used Frequency detection 2 ON Output freq
147. characteristics The Motor Rated Current E2 01 is incorrect Check the Motor Rated Current Setting E2 01 Inverter Overload The Inverter overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value The load is too heavy The accelera tion time deceleration time and cycle time are too short Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times The V f characteristics voltage is too high or too low Check the V f characteristics The Inverter capacity is too low Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger capacity Overtorque Detected 1 There has been a torque higher than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the time in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropri ate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque High slip Braking OL The output frequency did not change for longer than the time set in N3 04 The inertia of the connected machine is too large Make sure the load is an inertial load Undertorque Detected 1 There has been a torque lower than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the time in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropri ate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the undertorque PI Feedback Lost A PI feedback loss detection is enabled b5 12 0 and the PI feedback in
148. circuit wiring If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates when a RUN Command is Input The Inverter performs internal switching so there is a certain amount of leakage current This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level 1 e a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher with an operating time of 0 1 s or more or one that incorporates high frequencies 1 e one designed for use with Inverters It will also help to some extent to lower the Inverter s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 In addition remember that the leak age current increases as the cable is lengthened If There is Mechanical Oscillation BThe machinery is making unusual sounds The following causes are possible There may be resonance between the mechanical system s characteristic frequency and the T carrier frequency EE If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high pitched whine it may indicate that this is occurring To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6 02 to C6 05 There may be resonance between a machine s characteristic frequency and the output fre quency of the Inverter To prevent this from occurring either use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3 01 to d3 04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation BOscillation an
149. command response messages is given below Reading Inverter Memory Register Contents The content of maximum 16 inverter memory registers can be readout at a time Among other things the command message must contain the start address of the first register that 1s to be read out and the quantity of registers that should be read out The response message will contain the content of the first and the consecutive number of registers that has been set for the quantity The contents of the memory register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits The following tables show message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter Response Message Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Start Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H Address Lower 20H Ist storage Higher 00H T Higher 1 RC 16 Higher 00H register Lower 65H Lower 31H Quantity Lower 04H Next stor Higher 00H udis Higher 45H age register Lower 00H Lower FOH Next stor Higher 00H age register Lower 00H Next stor Higher 01H age register Lower F4H Higher AFH CRC 16 Lower 82H 6 72 Loopback Test The loopback test returns command messages directly as respon
150. content Slave address Function code Error check The space between messages must meet the following conditions PLC to Inverter Inverter to PLC PLC to Inverter Time Seconds t1 24 bits long 2 24 bits long 2 5 ms min Fig 6 46 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32 If you set 0 commands from the master will be received by all slaves Refer to Broadcast Data on the following pages Function Code The function code specifies commands The three function codes shown in the table below are available Command Message Response Message Function Code Function Hexadecimal Min Bytes Max Bytes Min Bytes Max Bytes Read memory register contents Loopback test Write multiple memory registers Data Configure consecutive data by combining the memory register address test code for a loopback address and the data the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details _ Error Check Errors during communications are detected using CRC 16 cyclic redundancy check checksum method The result of the checksum calculation is stored in a data word 16 bit which starting value is FFFH The value of this word is manipulated using Exclusive OR and SHIFT operations together with the data package that should be sent slave address function code data a
151. ction Diagrams os eee pc oh 2 13 wiring the Main Circuits s s dee daten ettet e ied 2 14 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals sssesenn 2 19 9 uL cree ea uA pie teen atr uM cet aad f 2 19 Control Circuit Terminal Functions sssseett tnn 2 21 Control Circuit Terminal Connections se nne 2 24 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions c ccccccscsesscsssestesesesessesestessstsssstssssesssseenceeeneeeens 2 25 Wining Check e T 2 26 9 Chet oai dote induat beu tessuto tecla dici uid 2 26 Installing and Wiring Option Cards 2 27 e Option Card Models uet cfi t eta dt Lote tU UE m 2 27 Installafionics Gin itis di a cet Ode d aerate 2 27 3 Digital Operator and 3 1 Digital Operator T 3 2 4 Diaital Opaerator Display sicot io Me bio oe di 3 2 Digital Operator Keys cere borea E Goes ti el Wh a wel nn 3 2 EE 3 4 Inverter Modes LLL erp qb di E a 3 4 4 Switching e Se deis ease 3 5 Divs esee pte tedesco Ki esit 3 6 Quick Programming Mode sse tentent tenens 3 7 Advanced Programming Moda corsi Se Re t Nt ende 3 8 Verity M dae cette he eoe e E t
152. ction selec 0 Disabled Oorl 1 No A tion 1 Enabled It is not recommended to disable this function Cooling Fan Control This function controls the fan that is mounted to the inverters heatsink Related Parameters Factory Access Setting Level Description Sets the ON OFF control for the cooling fan Cooling fan control selection 0 ON only when inverter output is active 1 ON whenever power is ON Sets the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the inverter STOP command is 0 to 300 given Cooling fan control delay time i Selecting the Cooling Fan Control Using parameter L8 10 two modes can be selected 0 The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON i e a voltage is output This is the factory setting 1 The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON If L8 10 is set to 0 the turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8 11 After a stop command the inverter waits for this time before switching OFF the cooling fan The factory setting 1s 300 sec 6 47 Setting the Ambient Temperature The overload capability of the inverter depends on the ambient temperature At ambient temperatures higher than 45 40 C for IP20 NEMAI types the output current capacity is reduced i e the OL2 alarm level will be lowered m Related Parameters Perene Settin Facto Change Access ter Num Name Description g ry during Range Sett
153. cy Acceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time in seconds for the output Deceleration time 1 frequency to fall from 100 to 0 Sets the acceleration time when multi function Acceleration time 2 input Acceleration deceleration time selection 1 is ON Sets the deceleration time when multi function Deceleration time 2 input Acceleration deceleration time selection 1 is ON Sets the frequency at which acceleration decelera tion time switches automatically Less than set frequency Acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration time 2 time switching frequency Set frequency or above Acceleration deceleration time 1 Multi function input Acceleration deceleration time selection 1 is given priority Sets the S curve characteristic time for each part in seconds When you set the S curve characteristic time the start time and end time S curve characteristic time s acceleration time is lengthened by 1 2 only Run command OFF S curve characteristic time at acceleration start S curve characteristic time at Output frequency acceleration end C2 02 li Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi Function Input Terminal Commands Two different acceleration times and deceleration times can be set When one multi function input terminal H1 OD is set to 7 acceleration deceleration time selection 1 you can switch the acceleration deceleration
154. d a 54 Down command Digital input SN neutral 2 A1 Frequency refer RENE 0 to 10 V analog ence lower limit signal AC Fig 6 38 Connection Example when UP DOWN Commands Are Allocated Output frequency Upper limit t Accelerates to lower limit Ls Same d4 01 1 frequency d4 01 0 y Lower limit Forward operation stop Duca 8 UP command Reference ON frequency reset 4 DOWN command Speed agree T E Powersupply ow T he speed agree signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating decelerating while the run command is ON Fig 6 39 UP DOWN Commands Time Chart 72 Trim Control Decrease Com mand Terminal Trim Control Function Speed The speed function increments or decrements the frequency reference from analog input by the value set in parameter d4 02 Speed Limit using two digital inputs To use this function set two of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact terminal inputs S3 to S7 function selection to 1C Trim Control Increase command and 1D Trim Control Decrease command Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease com mand are used as a pair Otherwise an OPEO03 alarm will be displayed m Related Parameters Param eter Number speed limits
155. d set in b1 03 The rive Enable Disable signal has to be ON before the RUN command is activated Bypass Drive Enable If Bypass Drive Enable 70 is programmed into one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 the drive will not exe cute a RUN command until this input is closed Unlike the setting 6A Drive Enable Disable the RUN command does not to be cycled after closing the input The drive will start whenever the digital input is closed a RUN command is active with the activated accelera tion time If a RUN command is active and the Bypass Drive Enable input is OFF the digital operator shows the alarm message dnE Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold When a multi function digital input is set for Accel Decel Ramp Hold 0 the input can be used to pause the acceleration or deceleration and maintain holds the output frequency Acceleration deceleration is restarted when the acceleration deceleration ramp hold input is turned OFF The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration deceleration ramp hold input is ON When parameter d4 01 the frequency reference hold function selecton is set to 1 the held frequency will be stored in memory This stored frequency will be retained as frequency reference even after a power loss and the motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again m Related Parameters Change
156. d hunting occur The gain and time parameter adjustments for the torque compensation may be insufficient Lower the gain set tings and raise the delay time settings Also adjust the hunting prevention function 1 00 BOscillation and hunting occur with PI control If there 1s oscillation or hunting during PI control check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I parameters refer to page 6 84 Using PI Control _ If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped If the motor coasts at low speed after a deceleration to stop has been executed it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough Adjust the DC injection braking as follows ncrease the parameter b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current setting ncrease the parameter b2 04 DC Injection Braking initial excitation Time at Stop setting If OV Overvoltage or OC Overcurrent is Detected When a Fan is Started or a Fan Stalls Generation of OV DC bus overvoltage or OC Overcurrent and stalling can occur if a fan is turning before it Is started e g through the windmill effect This can be prevented by stopping the fan rotation using DC injection braking before starting the fan Alterna tively the speed search function can be used to catch the rotating motor If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference BThe frequency reference is within the jump frequency range When the
157. d with 5 modes The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3 17 Drive mode Table 3 2 Modes Primary function s The Inverter can be run in this mode U se this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output cur rent displaying fault information or displaying the fault history Quick programming mode U se this mode to read and set the basic user parameters to operate the Inverter Advanced programming mode 3 4 U se this mode to reference and set all user parameters Verify mode U se this mode to read set user parameters that have been changed from their fac tory set values Autotuning mode U A se this mode when running a motor with unknown motor parameters During utotuning the line to line resistance is measured and set automatically Switching Modes The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes Press the DATA ENTER key from the mode selection display to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting display O ee DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Drive Mode Quick DRIVE Quick ADV VERIFY A TUNE Advanced Programming Mode Fut e evo 09 909 e e e x DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VE
158. e ora dn 00 eaa jm 02 001967 yoeqpao3 Id 80 9q 70 69 0 89 iv jndino Id euin elep Id z S 2XX LH d pe XX LH ld Jeoueo SJS Id 9 amp in grea HS 00 99 61 89 1018009 Id D 0 uojoun 4 ezoougs d ELE 777 mn ezoous id NUM go uuo onn 4 M07 ol H90 kepa zz sa i Buieog lezoou E Pd Sd ems NO yoosel Id Pee ee eee lii SI snjejs 94 pue 6 XX H ES 9660 LX Xew4 91 60 H 1090 02 ee jns jndui s Sor Suuna o ENGS 1 LZ Gq uonoejes DS 0 10 Sq 0 L deals 500 Ly leuw Lar 0 Jw H wo jepun 440 S 10409 m EH fouenben V e P gt P udi Z 4 PEN 9L 60 H AAPA 4 mno 0 m 1210 80 euaid o Ly oy 14 6OLX Xew4 a ddN IP 0 L0 VE XX LH D HN 77 10 99 Jeoueo 545 Id iio eusg uonoun J d js ie i Mc AAE A OAJ si 3ndjno uond deeis uoneledo ajgesiq ajqeuy a 9u 194 1 ouenbei P id a puc 40 UO Nay 1 9rsa ioi 10 14 i eo 99 uonoejes Z puewwoo 2
159. e breaker should be used select a breaker that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans but not high frequency leakage currents Fora special purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitiv ity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter When using a general earth leakage breaker choose one with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0 1 s or more Installing a Magnetic Contactor If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit a magnetic contactor can be used The following things should be considered The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor however may cause the Inverter to break down Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R S or T on the terminal block the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence Installing an AC Reactor If the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600 kW or more or a phase advancing capacito
160. e mode using the Local Remote Key 0 Run signals that are input dur ing mode switching are disre garded Input Run signals after switching the mode Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the Remote mode Run command selection in pro gramming modes Used to set an operation interlock in programming modes 0 Cannot operate 1 Can operate Disabled when Digital Operator is set to select run command when b1 02 0 Sets the delay time for the internal RUN command HAND Fref Source Description Sets the source of frequency refer ence for HAND operation 0 Digital Operator 1 Control Circuit Terminal ana log input This parameter is effective only if the HOA operator JVOP 162 is used EDC Injection Braking b2 Param eter Number DC injection braking starting frequency Description Used to set the frequency at which DC injection braking starts in units of Hz when b1 03 is set to 0 decel eration to stop When b2 01 is less than E1 09 E1 09 becomes the DC injection brak ing starting frequency Setting Range Setting Range Factory Setting Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register MEMO BUS Register DC injection braking current Sets the DC injection braking cur rent as a percentage of the inverter rated current DC injection braking time at start Used to set the time t
161. e the following precautions when mounting the Inverter Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust When installing or operating the Inverter always take special care so that metal powder oil water or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter Do not install the Inverter on combustible material such as wood Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45 C Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation Otherwise ventilation will be reduced causing the Inverter to overheat Ins
162. e torque compensation function primary delay in ms Normally there is no need to change this setting Adjust the parameter under the following circumstances f the motor is vibrating increase the set value f the motor response is low decrease the set value 6 27 Hunting Prevention Function The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load If high response has the priority to vibration suppression this function should be disabled N1 01 0 Related Parameters Change Setting Factory during Access Range Setting Opera Level tion Param eter Description Number Hunting prevention function 0 Hunting prevention function disabled selection 1 Hunting prevention function enabled Set the hunting prevention gain multiplication fac Hunting prevention gain tor E Adjusting the Hunting Prevention Gain N1 02 Normally it is not necessary to change this setting Adjust the value under the following circumstances f vibrations occur under light load condition increase the setting f the motor stalls reduce the setting Machine Protection Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter s output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed If the Inverter outp
163. ection to 2 or 36 to enable operation source switchover If a RUN command is active the switchover will not be accepted li Setting Precautions To use the operation source switching function make the following settings Set b1 01 frequency reference source to a value different from 3 option card Set 51 02 RUN command source to a value different from 3 option card Set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 to 2 or 36 Setting for one of Terminal H1 e to H1 05 Status Frequency Reference and Run Command Source OFF Inverter requency reference and Run command source are set in b1 01 and b1 Freq y refi dR d in b1 01 and b1 02 2 ON Communication option card Frequency reference and run command are input from communications option card q y p Communication option card Frequency reference and run command are input from communications option card 36 ON Inverter Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1 01 and b1 02 Switching Operation Source to MEMOBUS communication The frequency reference and RUN command source can be switched between the MEMOBUS communica tion via RS 422 485 and the inverter settings in b1 01 and b1 02 Therefore set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital inputs S3 to S7 to 6B or 6C If a RUN command is active the switchover will not be accepted i Setting precautions To use the operation source switching function make the fo
164. ed Programming Mode Setup settings A1 O0 eoe 5090 ESC 2 4 VE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Access level mmm LLLI ESC ESC Ea annnm Y PI control 65 00 oo LI Li ESC monn CH LOLI PI EN oss detection time J b 7 i 14 E i Y Copy functions 03 O0 Copy function selection TIT D BEC EIE TE3 Read permitted f J wo eevee DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE gt ESC M DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE eoee DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Fig 3 6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode E Setting User Parameters Below the procedure to change C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 from 10 s to 20 s is shown Table 3 3 Setting User Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode Digital Operator Display I7 ro DRIVE QUICK z VEI 3 gt 2 5 Description Power supply turned ON DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE MENU Key pressed to enter quick program ming mode DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE MENU Key pressed to enter advanced pro gramming mode DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DATA ENTER pressed to access monitor dis play DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Increment or Decrement Key pressed to dis play C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DATA ENTER Key pressed to access setting display The setting of C1 01
165. ed command 2 Jog frequency selection given priority over multi step speed command Combining Multi Step Speed References and Multi Function Digital Inputs You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON OFF status of S4 to S6 multi function digital input terminals The following table shows the possible combinations TerminalS4 Multi step Speed Command 1 TerminalS5 Multi step Speed Command 2 TerminalS6 Jog Frequency Selection Selected Frequency Frequency reference 1 11 01 master speed frequency Frequency reference 2 41 02 auxiliary frequency Frequency reference 3 d1 03 Frequency reference 4 d1 04 Jog frequency 41 17 Terminal S6 s jog frequency selection is given priority over multi step speed commands Setting Precautions When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2 observe the following precautions When setting terminal A1 s analog input to step 1 set b1 01 to 1 when setting 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 to step 1 set b1 01 to 0 When setting terminal A2 s analog input to step 2 set H3 09 to 2 auxiliary frequency reference When setting d1 02 Frequency Reference 2 to step 2 set H3 09 to 1F do not use analog inputs ilConnection Example and Time Chart The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9 step operation Inverter Forward stop Reverse s
166. een performed per form stationary autotuning for line to line resistance again 6 ilSpeed Search Selection The speed search method can be selected using b3 01 If b3 01 is set to 0 the search method is speed calcula tion It has to be activated by a multi function input 1 0 set to 61 or 62 If b3 01 is set to 1 the search method is speed calculation too but speed search is performed at every RUN command and has not to be activated by a multifunction input The same is valid for setting b3 01 to 2 or 3 only the search method is current detection and not speed calcu lation Search Name Search Method Speed Calculation Calculates the motor speed when the search starts and accelerates or decelerates from the calculated speed to the set frequency The direction of motor rotation is also detected Current Detection Starts speed search from the frequency when the temporary power loss was detected or from the high est frequency and performs speed detection by watching the current level during the search External Speed Search Command External search command 1 and external search command 2 become the same operation calculation of the motor speed and starting the search from the calculated speed External speed search command 1 Starts speed search from the maximum output fre quency External speed search command 2 Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command
167. en the last fault occurred he error trace CPF00 01 02 03 UV1 and UV2 Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Out put Cannot be output MEMO BUS Register B Fault History Param eter Number Last fault Description The error content of 1st last fault Second last fault The error content of 2nd last fault Third last fault The error content of 3rd last fault Fourth last fault The error content of 4th last fault at fault Cumulative operation time The total operating time when the Ist previous fault occurred ond fault Accumulated time of sec The total operating time when the 2nd previous fault occurred fault Accumulated time of third The total operating time when the 3rd previous fault occurred Accumulated time of fourth oldest fault The total operating time when the 4th previous fault occurred Fifth last to tenth last fault The error content of the 5th to 10th last fault to tenth fault Accumulated time of fifth Total generating time when Sth 10th previous fault occurred Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output Note The following errors not recorded in the error log CPF00 01 02 03 UV1 and UV2 MEMO BUS Register Setting Values that Change with t
168. enabled for decelera tion Hence the deceleration time may be longer than the set time C1 02 04 To prevent the braking unit braking resistor unit from overheating design the control circuit to turn OFF the inverter output using the thermal overload relay contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2 7 2 17 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0 4 to 18 5 kW Output Capacity CDBR Braking LKEB Braking Unit Resistor Unit Thermal protector Inverter i trip contact Thermal overload relay trip contact 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output CDBR Braking LKEB Braking Unit Resistor Unit Thermal protector Inverter trip contact Thermal overload relay trip contact Fig 2 7 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit Connecting Braking Units in Parallel When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in Fig 2 8 There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave Select Master for the first Braking Unit only and select Slave for all other Braking Units i e from the second Unit onwards Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact Braking Resistor Unit Braking Resistor Unit Inverter Level detector SLAVE Braking Unit 3 Thermal overload relay Thermal overload relay T
169. ency reference without Enter key operation Operation selec tion when digital operator is dis connected Sets the operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected 0 Disabled Operation continues even if the Digital Operator is disconnected 1 Enabled OPR is detected at Digital Operator disconnection Inverter output is switched off and fault contact is operated Cumulative oper ation time setting Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units Operation time is calculated from the set values Cumulative oper ation time selec tion 0 Cumulative time when the Inverter power is on All time while the Inverter power is on is accumulated 1 Cumulative Inverter run time Only Inverter output time is accumulated Initialize Mode Description 1 American Spec 2 Europe Spec 4 PV A Spec 5 PV E Spec Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Fan operation time setting Set the initial value of the fan oper ation time The operation time accumulates from the set value Fault trace initial ize 0 Disable 1 Initialize zero clear after set ting 1 02 12 will be returned to 0 Energy monitor initialize Resets the monitor parameters U1 24 and U1 30 back to zero 0 No change 1 Reset to zero HAND Key func tion selection Copy Function 03 Param eter Number Copy function selection
170. ents the digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installa tion or operation The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give rise to other dangers The instructions in this manual must be followed Installation operation and maintenance may only be carried out by qualified personnel For the purposes of the safety precautions qualified personnel are defined as indi viduals who are familiar with the installation starting operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and have the proper qualifications for this work Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used properly for their intended purpose The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers All of the main circuit terminals may still carry dangerous voltages Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with any form of access to the inverters iintended Use Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Volt age Directive EN 50178 1997 1
171. er is supplied to the Inverter Detection during operation Detects only during Inverter operation _ Output Terminal Functions The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2 01 and H2 02 parameters ter minal M1 to 4 function selection These functions are described in the following section Related Parameters Change during Operation Setting Factory Description Range Setting Terminal M1 M2 function selection Multi function contact output 1 Terminal M3 MA function Multi function contact output 2 selection iDuring Run Setting 0 and During Run 2 Setting 37 During Run Setting 0 OFF The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage ON The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output During Run 2 Setting 37 The inverter is not outputting a frequency Baseblock DC injection braking or stopped The inverter is outputting a frequency These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter s operating status Run command OFF ON Baseblock command OFF ON Output frequency During run 1 output OFF ON i During run 2 output OFF Fig 6 41 Timing Chart for During RUN Output mm BZero Speed Setting 1 OFF The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level b2 01 ON The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level b2 01
172. eration Voltage Limiter limits the range for the voltage search operation For 200 V Class Inverters a range of 100 is equal to 200 V and for 400 V Class Invert ers a range of 100 is equal to 400 V Set to 0 to disable the search operation voltage limiter Setting Motor Parameters Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level Sets the motor rated current This set value will become the reference value for motor protection and torque limits It is an input data for autotuning Motor rated current Sets the motor no load current Motor no load current This parameter is automatically set during autotun ing Sets the motor phase to phase resistance Motor line to line resistance This parameter is automatically set during autotun ing Note All factory settings are for a Yaskawa standard 4 pole motor The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW 2 The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW 3 The setting range depends on the inverter capacity The values for a 200 V class inverter of 0 4 kW are given i Manual Setting of the Motor Parameter Motor Rated Current Setting Set E2 01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate Motor Line to Line Resistance Setting
173. ers can only be changed after inputting the right password Used to set a four digit number as the password This parameter is not usually displayed When the Password setting password A1 04 is displayed hold down the RESET key and press the Menu key and A1 05 will be displayed Displaying User set Parameters Only The A2 parameters user set parameters and A1 01 parameter access level can be used to establish a param eter set that contains only the most important parameters Set the number of the parameter to which you want to refer in A2 01 to A2 32 and then set A1 01 to 1 Using the advanced programming mode you can read and modify A1 01 to A1 03 and the parameters set in A2 01 to A2 32 only Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level Used to set the parameter numbers that can be set read Maximum 32 User setting parameters Effective when the access level A1 01 is set to User Program 1 Parameters set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be set read in programming mode Troubleshooting This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for Inverter and motor problems Protective and Diagnostic Functions Troubleshooting Protective and Diagnostic Functions This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter The alarm functions include fault detection alarm detection operati
174. estart attempts is reset to 0 when the drive has run 10 minutes without fault fault occur ance fault i output controller d i delay i RUN c d controller 1 retry func tion 12 03 L5 03 max j controller ee base block f total base s a block time Fig 6 34 Timing Chart for Auto Restart Function E Auto Restart External Outputs To output auto restart signals externally set H2 01 or H2 02 multi function contact output terminals M1 M2 or M3 M4 function selection to 1E auto restart Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Factory Access Setting Level Sets the number of auto restart attempts Number of auto restart attempts Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency Sets whether a fault contact output is activated Auto restart operation selec during fault restart tion 0 Not output Fault contact is not activated 1 Output Fault contact is activated Fault Retry Time Sets the maximum time a restart is tried B Application Precautions The number of auto restarts counter 15 reset under the following conditions After auto restart normal operation has continued for 10 minutes After the protection operation has been performed and an error reset has been input After the power supply is turned OFF and then ON again M Inverte
175. ets the analog output voltage value which is equal to 100 of the monitor item The bias sets the analog output voltage value which 15 equal to 096 of the monitor item Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V A voltage higher than these values can not be output Adjusting the Meter The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog output channel is shown on three examples in Fig 6 50 Output voltage Gain 17096 Bias 3096 10V pe Gain 100 s Bias 0 Oe p 3V Gain 0 Bias 100 Monitor item ov e g Output Frequency 100 Fig 6 43 Monitor Output Adjustment M Individual Functions Using MEMOBUS Communications You can perform serial communications with Programmable Logic Controls PLCs or similar devices using the MEMOBUS protocol BMEMOBUS Communications Configuration MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master PLC and a maximum of 31 slaves Serial com munications between master and slave are normally started by the master and the slaves respond The master performs serial communications with only one slave at a time Consequently you must set the address of each slave before so that the master can perform serial communications using that address A slave that receives a command from the master performs the specified function and sends a response to the master PLC Inver
176. ets the timer function output OFF delay time dead band for the timer function input in 1 second units Enabled when a timer function is set in 1 and 2 00 Description 0 Disabled Enabled 3 PI control enabled frequency reference PI output Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Proportional gain P Sets P control proportional gain P control is not performed when the setting 1s 0 00 Integral I time Sets I control integral time in 1 second units I control is not performed when the setting is 0 0 Integral limit Sets the I control limit as a per centage of the maximum output frequency PI limit Sets the limit after PI control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PI offset adjust ment Sets the offset after PI control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PI delay time constant Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PI control outputs in 1 second units Usually not necessary to set PI output charac teristics selection Selects forward reverse direction for PI output 0 PI output is forward 1 PI output is reverse PI output gain Sets output gain PI reverse output selection 0 Limit to 0 when PI output is negative 1 Reverses when PI output is neg ative Limit to 0 is also active when reverse prohibit is selected by b1 04
177. evention level during running Speed agreement detection level Speed agreement detection width Operation when frequency reference is missing Fret Fret Loss Number of auto restart attempts Auto restart operation selection Fault Retry Time Torque detection selection 1 Torque detection level 1 Torque detection time 1 Overheat pre alarm level Operation selection after overheat pre alarm Input phase loss detection level Ground protection selection Cooling fan control selection Cooling fan control delay time Ambient temperature OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds xoxo X X Soft CLA selection Factory Setting Setting Frequency reference during OH pre alarm Hunting prevention function selection Hunting prevention gain High slip braking deceleration frequency width High slip braking current limit High slip braking stop dwell time High slip braking OL time Monitor selection Monitor selection after power up Frequency units of reference setting and monitor LCD Focus Monitor mode Selection 2nd monitor selection 9 3rd monitor selection LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable STOP key during control circuit terminal operation User parameter initial value kVA selection Frequency reference setting method selection Oper
178. fault list E Minor Fault Output Setting 10 If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs refer to page 7 7 Alarm Detection pp Reset Command Active Setting 11 If a multifunction output is set for this function the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is input at one of the digital inputs Reverse Direction Setting 1A If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever the drive is turning the motor in the direction that corresponds to reverse direction Pre Alarm Setting 20 The overheat fault function OH is designed to protect the drive from excessive temperature damage Ther mistors attached to the heatsink of the drive monitor the temperature and will fault the drive if the temperature reaches 105 C An OH Pre Alarm digital output will close whenever the heatsink temperature reaches the level specified by parameter L8 02 Parameter L8 03 will determine the drive s response to reaching the OH Pre Alarm level besides closing the configured digital output BDrive Enabled Setting 38 If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the drive is enabled The drive can be enabled or disabled using a digital multifunction input iDuring oH and Reduced Frequency Setting If a multifunction output is pr
179. follow ing illustration Fig 1 13 Removing the Digital Operator Model CIMR E7Z45P5 Shown Above iRemoving the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration Fig 1 14 Removing the Front Cover Model CIMR E7Z45P5 Shown Above E Mounting the Front Cover After wiring the terminals mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order 1 Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover otherwise Digital Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact 2 Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut Mounting the Digital Operator After attaching the terminal cover mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following proce dure 1 Hook the Digital Operator at A two locations on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration 2 Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B two locations Fig 1 15 Mounting the Digital Operator 1 Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove
180. for deceleration during high High slip braking current slip braking in percent taking the motor rated cur 100 to N3202 limit rent as 100 The resulting limit must be 150 of 200 150 No 5 the inverter rated current or less Sets the dwell time of the output frequency for High slip braking stop dwell FMIN 1 5 Hz 0 0 to N3 03 time Effective only during deceleration with high slip 10 0 Hes braking Sets the OL7 time when the output frequency does 30 t N3 04 High slip braking OL time not change for some reason during deceleration 40s No A drei 1200 with high slip braking Adjusting the HSB Deceleration Frequency Width N3 01 This parameter sets the step value that is used for lowering the output frequency to achieve a large negative slip and thereby to brake the motor Normally no adjustments should be necessary Increase the value 1f DC bus overvoltage faults occur Adjusting the HSB Current Limit N3 02 The setting of parameter N3 02 limits the output current while high slip braking is active The current limit affects the achievable deceleration time The lower the current limit the longer is the deceleration time Setting the HSB Dwell Time at Stop N3 03 At the end of a high slip braking the output frequency is held at the minimum output frequency for the time set in N3 03 Increase the time 1f the motor coasts after HSB Setting the HSB Overload Time N3 04 N3
181. for the max output frequency 2 to 39 40 to 39999 Set digit number ex cluding the decimal point Example When the max output frequency value is 200 0 set 12000 LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable Set the run method selection key LOCAL REMOTE key function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Switches between the Digital Opera tor and the parameter settings STOP key during control cir cuit terminal operation Set the STOP key in the run mode 0 Disabled When the run command is issued from an external terminal the Stop key is disa bled 1 Enabled Effective even during run User parameter initial value Clears or stores user initial values 0 Stores not set 1 Begins storing Records the set parameters as user initial values 2 All clear Clears all recorded user initial values When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values 1110 will be set in A1 03 Frequency reference setting method selection When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor sets whether the Enter key is necessary or not 0 Enter key needed 1 Enter key not needed When set to 1 the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter key operation Operation selection when dig ital operator is disconnected Description Sets the operation when the Digital Operator is dis connected 0 Disabled
182. from E1 09 when b2 01 E1 09 Set the DC injection braking current as a percent DC injection braking current age taking the Inverter rated current as 100 Set the DC injection braking time at stop Use when stopping if rotations continue due to the machines inertia Set to 0 00 to disable DC injection braking time at stop DC injection braking time at stop Deceleration to Stop If the stop command is input the run command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 0 the motor decelerates to stop according to the deceleration time that has been set Factory setting C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 If the output frequency when decelerating to stop falls below b2 01 the DC injection brake will be applied using the DC current set in b2 02 for the time set in b2 04 For deceleration time settings refer to page 6 15 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times Run command Output frequency Decelerates to stop deceleration time DC injection brake DC injection brake time when stopping b2 04 Fig 6 12 Deceleration to Stop ilCoast to Stop If the stop command is input i e the run command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 1 the Inverter output voltage is switched off The motor coasts to stop Run command ON OFF Output frequency Inverter output frequency interrupted Fig 6 13 Coast to Stop A After the stop command is input run commands are igno
183. g the motor The torque characteristic generally is different from those when starting a motor at a normal commercial power supply If a large initial torque is required select an Inverter with a somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter E Options Terminals 41 2 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Omron Yaskawa Motion Control Never connect any other devices to these terminals Installation Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter in Enclosures Either install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist dust and other contaminants or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials Binstallation Direction Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface Settings Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter BUpper Limits The Digital Operator can be used to set high speed operation up to a maximum of 200 Hz Incorrect settings can be dangerous Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits The maximum output frequency 15 factory set to 50 Hz HDC Injection Braking The motor can overhe
184. he Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 2 Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the cable 3 Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan Y Air flow direction a Fan cover Fig 8 1 Cooling Fan Replacement Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less Mounting the Cooling Fan 1 Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure that the air flow direction is correct see figure above i 2 Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover 3 Mount the fan cover on the Inverter Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter heatsink 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel Removing the Cooling Fan 1 2 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the Inverter Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted Remove all cables connected to the con troler Remove the
185. he V f Pattern Selection 1 03 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 1 5 kW Parameter Number E1 03 Factory Setting 7 8 The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters The values will double for 400 V class Inverters 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2 2 to 45 kW Parameter Number Factory Setting E1 03 6 7 8 The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters The values will double for 400 V class Inverters 8200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW Parameter Number Factory Setting E1 03 6 7 8 E1 04 Hz 50 0 60 0 60 0 72 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 90 0 120 0 60 0 ELM 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 E1 06 Hz 50 0 60 0 50 0 60 0 50 0 500 60 0 50 0 500 60 0 60 0 60 0 600 E1 07 Hz 25 30 30 250 250 300 25 25 ne v 120 120 120 120 350 500 35 0 500 150 200 150 200 120 120 120 E1 09 1 15 15 15 1 1 15 15 1 1 15 15 15 15 15 ELI 60 60 50 so 70 90 70
186. he connector from rising The Option Clip can be easily removed before installing the card by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out CN2 C Option Card connector C Option Card mounting spacer C Option Card Option Clip To prevent raising of C Option Card Fig 2 15 Mounting Option Cards 2 27 p Digital Operator Modes This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions and pro vides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes Digital Operator M _ This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator Digital Operator Display The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below REMOTE a al FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM PRGM DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO TUNING D x RESET p A M LOCAL REMOTE lv MENU m Drive Mode Indicators FWD Lights up when a forward run command is input REV Lights up when a reverse run command is input SEQ Lights up when the run command from the control circuit terminal is enabled REF Lights up when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled zl ALARM Lights up when an error or alarm has occurred Data Display Displays monitor data parameter numbers and set tings L Mode Display
187. he terminal A2 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias Frequency bias P Multi function analog input terminal A2 input level OV 4 0 mA 10 V 20 mA Fig 6 23 Frequency Bias Adjustment Terminal A2 Input For example if H3 02 is 10096 H3 03 15 096 and terminal A2 is set to 1 V the frequency reference when 0 V is input to Al will be 10 of the maximum output frequency E1 04 1 Frequency reference 10 96 Bias 0v 10V Terminal A1 input voltage Operation Avoiding Resonance Jump Frequency Function This function allows the prohibition or jumping of certain frequencies within the Inverter s output fre quency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems It can also be used for deadband control Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Factory Setting Jump frequency 1 Set the frequency center value of the jump fre quency settings in hertz Set to 0 0 to disable the jump frequency function Make sure that the settings are as follows d3 01 2 d3 02 2 d3 03 Operation within the jump frequency range is pro hibited Changes during acceleration and decelera Jump frequency 3 tion are made gradually without performing jumps Jump frequency 2 Sets the jump frequency width in hertz Jump frequency width The jump frequency range is as follows Jump fre quency d3 04
188. he value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 5 37 Special Adjustments iHunting Prevention Function Param eter Number Hunting preven tion function selection Description 0 Hunting prevention function disabled 1 Hunting prevention function enabled Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register Hunting preven tion gain Sets the hunting prevention gain multiplication factor BHigh slip Braking Param eter Number High slip brak ing deceleration frequency width Description Sets the frequency width for decel eration during high slip braking in percent taking the maximum fre quency E1 04 as 100 Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register High slip brak ing current limit Sets the current limit for decelera tion during high slip braking in percent taking the motor rated cur rent as 100 The resulting limit must be 120 of the Inverter rated current or less High slip brak ing stop dwell time Sets the dwell time for the output frequency for FMIN 1 5 Hz Effective only during deceleration with high slip braking High slip brak ing OL time Set the OL time when the output frequency does not change for any reason during deceleration with high slip braking Digital Operator Parameters o E Monitor Select o1 Param
189. hen main circuit DC voltage is below 380 V Momentary power loss ride through By selecting the momentary power loss method operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration or running Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits Charge indicator Lights up when the main circuit DC voltage is approx 50 V or more Protective structure Enclosed wall mounted type NEMA 1 18 5 kW or less same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters Open chassis type IP00 22 kW or more same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters Environment Ambient operating tem perature 10 C to 40 C Enclosed wall mounted type 10 C to 45 C Open chassis type Ambient operating humid ity 95 max with no condensation Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C short term temperature during transportation Application site Indoor no corrosive gas dust etc Altitude 1000 m max Vibration 10 to 20 Hz 9 8 m s2 max 20 to 50 Hz 2 m s2 max 1 Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected 10 Appendix This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter motor and peripheral devices and also provides lists of parameters Inverter Application Precautions
190. hermal overload relay contact contact contact Fig 2 8 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel _ iring Control Circuit Terminals Wire Sizes For remote operation using analog signals keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or oper ation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less and separate the lines from main power lines or other control cir cuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices When setting frequencies from an external frequency source and not from a Digital Operator use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Same for all models Terminals FM AC AM SC SP SN Al A2 V S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 MA MB MC MI M2 M3 M4 R R S S IG Termi nal Screws Phoenix type Tightening Torque Nem 0 5 to 0 6 Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG Single wire 0 14 to 2 5 Stranded wire 0 14 to 1 5 26 to 14 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG E G 0 8 to 1 0 0 5 to 2 20 to 14 Use shielded twisted pair cables to input an external frequency reference 2 We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability Wire Type Shielded twisted pair wire 1 Shielded polyethyle
191. higher Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage The jumper is factory set to 440 V when shipped If the power supply voltage is not 440 V use the following procedure to change the setting Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes 4 Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out Remove the terminal cover Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter see Fig 4 41 Qu s Return the terminal cover to its original position Connector i Jumper factory set position 200 V class power supply 400V class power supply Power supply input terminals CHARGE indicator Fig 4 2 Power Supply Voltage Setting Power ON Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply Check that the power supply 15 of the correct voltage 200 V class 3 phase 200 to 240 VDC 50 60 Hz 400 V class 3 phase 380 to 480 VDC 50 60 Hz Make sure that the motor output terminals U V W and the motor are connected correctly Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system no load status 1f possible Checking the Display Status After normal power up without any fa
192. ility EMC e g shielding grounding filter arrangement and laying of cables This also applies to equipment with the CE mark It is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits Your supplier or Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative must be contacted when using leakage cur rent circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency inverters In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified Notes The VARISPEED E7 frequency inverters are certified to CE UL and c UL M EtMc Compatibility Bintroduction This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using OMRON YASKAWA Motion Control OYMC frequency inverters design and install electrical switchgear It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive The manual s installation and wiring instructions must therefore be fol lowed Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below Product standard EN 61800 3 1996 EN 61800 3 A11 2000 E Measures to Ensure Conformity of OYMC Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive OYMC frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible t
193. ime set in C1 09 If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact set the multi function input terminal H1 LILI to 15 and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact set the multi function input terminal H1 LILI to 17 After the emergency stop command has been input operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped To cancel the emergency stop turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command Related parameters Param A eter Description g Number 9 9 Sets the deceleration time when the multi function input Emergency fast stop is ON Emergency stop time This time will be used when a fault is detected for which emergency stop was programmed as stop ping method _ Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times Acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 096 to 10096 of the maximum out put frequency E1 04 Deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from 100 to 096 of E1 04 The accel decel times 1 are used with the factory setting the accel decel times 2 can be selected using a multifunction input m Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Factory Setting Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequen
194. in register address 000FH to 1 enable disable PI target value from commu MEMOBUS register 0006H nications to be able to use register number 0006H as the PI target value Parameter setting If b5 18 is set to 1 the value in b5 19 becomes the PI target value in Hz on the operator Nevertheless internally the PI target value is used in percent Le the following Qu Ifthe PI function is used the frequency reference value becomes the target value which is set and shown formula is used INFO frequency reference Hz max output frequency Hz 100 PI target value 96 6 87 PI Feedback Input Methods Select one of the following PI control feedback input methods Input Method Setting Conditions Analog input A2 Set H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection to B PI feedback Analog input A1 Differential Set H3 09 to 16 Analog input A1 becomes the feedback 1 input and the analog input A2 Mode becomes the feedback 2 input If H3 09 is set to 16 the PI differential mode is activated Both analog inputs Al and A2 become feedback inputs and the difference between both becomes the feedback value for the PI controller The monitor U1 24 becomes the feedback 1 monitor U1 53 becomes the feedback 2 monitor In this mode the PI target value automatically is taken from the source set in b1 01 or a multistep speed refer ence d1 01 to 41 04 EPI Adjustment Examples Suppressing Overshoot If
195. ing Level ber Operation The ambient temperature must be set in parameter L8 12 OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed At output frequencies below 6 Hz the overload capability of the inverter is lower than at higher speeds i e OL2 fault inverter overload may occur even if the current is below the normal OL2 current level see Fig 6 35 OL2 Detection Level 120 for 1 min 60 for 1 min Output Speed 6 Hz 0 Hz 6 Hz Fig 6 35 OL2 Alarm Level at Low Frequencies Related Parameters Settin Facto Genee ter Num Name Description g Ty during Range Setting Level ber Operation L8 15 OL2 characteristics selection 0 OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled E A at low speeds 1 OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled Generally it is not recommended to disable this function Otherwise the inverter time might be shortened 6 48 Soft CLA Selection Soft CLA is a current detection level for the output IGBT protection Using parameter L8 18 Soft CLA can be enabled or disabled Related Parameters auae Settin Facto Gee Description 9 y during Range Setting Level ber Operation L8 18 Soft CLA selection 0 Disable E or 1 1 Enable Generally it is absolutely not recommended to disable this function Input Terminal Functions Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and
196. ion Display Functions and Levels The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter No Function Page MENU Drive Mode 01 Status Monitor Parameters 5 43 U2 Fault Trace 5 46 Fu ist zz AI Initialize Mode 5 10 A2 User specified Setting Mode 5 11 bl Operation Mode Selections 5 12 b2 DC Injection Braking 5 13 Quick Programming Mode b3 Speed Search 5 14 Minimum parameters required b4 Timer Function 3 15 for operation can be monitored b5 PI Control 5 15 orsel b8 Energy Saving 5 17 Cl Acceleration Deceleration 5 18 C2 S curve Acceleration 5 19 C4 Torque Compensation 5 19 C6 Carrier Frequency 5 20 Advanced Programming Mode di Preset Reference 3 21 42 Reference Limits 5 21 parameters can be moni d3 Jump Frequencies 3 22 fered cse d4 Reference Frequency Hold 5 22 El V f Pattern 5 23 E2 Motor Setup 5 24 F6 Communications Option Card 5 25 H1 Multi function Digital Inputs 5 26 H2 Multi function Digital Outputs 5 27 Verify Mode H3 Multi function Analog Inputs 5 28 Parameters changed from the H4 Multi function Analog Outputs 5 30 be moni H5 MEMOBUS Communications 5 31 L1 Motor Overload 5 32 L2 Power Loss Ride through 5 33 L3 Stall Prevention
197. ion analog out put 2 terminal AM bias Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 0V output at terminal AM The maximum output from the ter minal is 10 V Analog output 1 signal level selec tion Sets the signal output level for multi function output 1 terminal FM 0 0 to 10 V output 2 4 20 mA Analog output 2 signal level selec tion Ananalog output signal of 4 20 mA requires an optional terminal board for current output Sets the signal output level for multi function output 2 terminal AM 0 0 to 10 V output 2 4 20 mA Station address BMEMOBUS Communications H5 Description Sets the Inverter s node address Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Communications speed selection Sets the baud rate for MEMOBUS communications 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Communications parity selection Sets the parity for MEMOBUS communications 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Stopping method after communica tions error Sets the stopping method for com munications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation 4 Continue operation with the fre quency reference set in d1 04 Communications error detection selection Sets whether or n
198. ion counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively Using parameter 02 10 the counter can be reset e g when the fan was replaced BFault Trace Initialize 02 12 This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter 02 12 to 1 EEnergy Monitor Initialize 02 14 This function can be used to initialize the energy monitor by setting parameter 02 14 to 1 BHAND Key Funktion Selection 02 15 With this parameter the HAND key can be enabled by setting parameter 02 15 to 1 The factory setting 1s 0 HAND key disabled The parameter is effective only if the optional HOA operator JVOP 162 Copying Parameters The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using a built in EEPROM non volatile mem Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator READ Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter COPY Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter parameters settings VERIFY Related Parameters Param Change TUR Setting Factory during Access eter Name Description Range Setting Opera Level Number tion 0 Normal operation 1 READ Inverter to Operator 2 COPY Operator to Inverter 3 Verify compare 0 READ prohibited 1 READ permitted Copy function selection 03 02 Read permitted selection iStoring Inverter set values in the Digital Operator READ
199. ir cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults 2 Ground the cable shields so as to maximize the contact area of the shield and ground Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends Wiring Check Checks Check all wiring after wiring has been completed Do not perform continuity check on control circuits Per form the following checks on the wiring s all wiring correct Have no wire clippings screws or other foreign material been left Are all screws tight Are any wire ends contacting other terminals me iQ Installing and Wiring Option Cards Option Card Models Option cards for field bus communications can be mounted in the Inverter like shown in Fig 2 15 Table 2 11 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications Table 2 11 Option Cards DeviceNet communications card d Profibus DP communications card SI P1 2 InterBus S communications card SI RI CANOpen communications card SI SI LonWorks communications card SI J Installation Before mounting an Option Card remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the Inverter does not glow anymore After that remove the Digital Operator and front cover and then mount the Option Card B Preventing Option Card Connectors from Rising After installing the Option Card insert the Option Clip to prevent the side with t
200. iven 3 The setting range depends on the inverter capacity The values for a 200 V class inverter of 0 4 kW are given Option Parameters F ilCommunications Option Cards F6 Param eter Number Operation selec Description Set the stopping method for com munications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register F6 01 tion after commu 0to3 1 3A2H nications error 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Input level of external error F6 02 fromCommuni S Aweys daet Oorl 0 No A 3A3H 1 Detect during operation cations Option Card 0 Deceleration to stop using the Stoppitig deceleration time in C1 02 for external error 1 Coast to st F6 03 from Communi OP 0t3 1 No A 3A4H 2 Emergency stop using the cations Option RAS deceleration time in C1 09 Card 3 Continue operation Sets the unit of current monitor F6 05 Tent monnor 0 Ampere Oorl 0 No A 3A6H unit selection 1 100 8192 Terminal Function Parameters Multi function Digital Inputs H1 Param eter Description Setting Factory Access BUS Number Range Setting Level Register Terminal S3 function selection Multi function digital input 1 Terminal
201. jump frequency function 15 used the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency parameters d3 01 to d3 03 and Jump Frequency Width parameter d3 04 settings are suitable EThe frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 x Frequency Reference Upper Limit d2 01 100 T Check to be sure that the parameter E1 04 and d2 01 settings are suitable 7 18 Maintenance and Inspection This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter Maintenance and Inepectioli uuus serre toi 8 2 M Maintenance and Inspection Outline of Maintenance The maintenance period of the Inverter is as follows Maintenance Period Within 18 months from shipping from the factory or within 12 months from being deliv ered to the final user whichever comes first Daily Inspection Check the following items with the system in operation The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation The ambient temperature should not be too high The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally Periodic Inspection Check
202. k loss detection level for longer than the time set in b5 14 PI feedback loss detection time MEMOBUS Communications Error Normal receive was not possible for 2 s or longer after received control data Check the communications devices and signals Option Card Communications Error A communications error occurred in a mode where the run command or a frequency reference is set from an Communications Option Card Check the communications devices and signals Communications on Standby Control data was not normally received when power was turned ON Check the communications devices and signals Drive not enabled An digital input is programmed to 6A Drive Enable or 70 Bypass Drive Enable and RUN command was input while the drive was not enabled Check the wiring and sequence of the external signals Cannot Reset Itis tried to reset a fault whilea RUN command is still active Remove the RUN command and reset Operation Errors An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings It won t be possible to start the Inverter until the parameters have been set correctly The alarm output and fault contact outputs will not operate When an operation error has occurred refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the errors Display Meaning Incorrect Inverter capac ity setting Inc
203. lation in this example is not done completely normally data would follow the function code Calculations Overflow Description TTT TTIT ITIT ITIT Initial value 0000 0010 Address 1111 1111 1111 1101 ExOr Result 0111 1111 1111 1110 1 Shift 1 1010 0000 0000 0001 Result 0110 1111 1111 1111 1 Shift 2 1010 0000 0000 0001 Result 0110 0111 1111 1111 0 Shift 3 0011 0011 1111 1111 1 Shift 4 1010 0000 0000 0001 TO01 0011 IHT 1110 ExOr Result 0100 1001 1111 1111 0 Shift 5 0010 0100 1111 1111 Shift 6 1010 0000 0000 0001 1000 0100 1111 1110 ExOr Result 0100 0010 0111 1111 0 Shift 7 0010 0001 0011 1111 1 Shift 8 1010 0000 0000 0001 7 100000010011 1110 ExOr Result Function Code 1000 0001 0011 1101 ExOr Result 0100 0000 1001 1110 1 Shift 1 1010 0000 0000 0001 711000001000 HH ExOr Result 0111 0000 0100 1111 1 Shift 2 1010 0000 0000 0001 T101 0000 0100 1110 ExOr Result 0110 1000 0010 0111 0 Shift 3 0011 0100 0001 0011 1 Shift 4 1010 0000 0000 0001 TOOT 0100 0001 0010 ExOr Result 0100 1010 0000 1001 0 Shift 5 0010 0101 0000 0100 1 Shift 6 1010 0000 0000 0001 1000 0101 0000 0101 ExOr Result 0100 0010 1000 0010 1 Shift 7 1010 0000 0000 0001 T110 0010 1000 0011 ExOr Result 0111 0001 0100 0001 1 Shift 8 1010 0000 0000 0001 110100010100 0000 ExOr Result DIH 40H CRC 16 Result Higher Lower Byte Byte 6 71 BMEMOBUS Message Example An example of MEMOBUS
204. linear set E1 07 and E1 09 to the same value In this case E1 08 will be ignored Output voltage V E1 05 VMAX E1 13 VBASE E1 08 VB E1 10 VMIN Frequency Hz E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 FMIN FB FA FMAX Fig 6 54 User Set V f Pattern i Setting Precautions When the setting is to user defined V f pattern beware of the following points When changing control method the parameters E1 07 to E1 10 will change to the factory settings for that control method Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows E1 04 FMAX gt E1 06 FA gt E1 07 FB gt E1 09 FMIN 6 High Slip Braking If the load inertia is large the high slip braking function can be used to shorten the deceleration time compared to the normal deceleration time without using a braking option e g for emergency stops The function must be activated by a multifunction input Note the following The HSB function is not comparable with the normal deceleration function It does not use a ramp func tion HSB should not be used at normal operation instead of a deceleration ramp Related Parameters Change during Operation Constan Number Factory Setting Description Sets the frequency width for deceleration during high slip braking in percent taking the maximum 1 to 20 5 No A frequency E1 04 as 100 N3 01 High slip braking decelera tion frequency width Sets the current limit
205. llowing settings Set b1 01 Frequency reference source to a value different from 2 Memobus Set b1 02 RUN command source to a value different from 2 Memobus Set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 to 6B or 6C Setting for one of Terminal H1 01 to H1 05 Status Frequency Reference and Run Command Source Inverter Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1 01 and b1 02 MEMOBUS communication Frequency reference and run command are input via RS 422 485 MEMOBUS communication Frequency reference and run command are input via RS 422 485 Inverter Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1 01 and b1 02 AUTO HAND Mode Switching by Digital Input The settings 6D and 6E for H1 01 to H1 05 allow to switch between HAND and AUTO mode by digital input Both signals cannot both be programmed simultaneously If the Auto Mode Selection is programmed into a digital input the Auto mode will be selected whenever that input is closed The status of the Auto Mode Selection digital input will override any digital operator selec tions If the Hand Mode Selection is programmed into a digital input the Hand mode will be selected whenever that input is closed The status of the Hand Mode Selection digital input will override any digital operator selec tions Using either the Auto Mode Selection or the Hand Mode Selection can only be done when the Drive is stopped
206. lower limits set in parameters d2 01 to d2 03 Here the frequency value from analog frequency reference input Al becomes the frequency reference lower limit If using a combination of the frequency reference from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either parameter d2 02 or d2 03 the larger limit value will become the frequency reference lower limit If inputting the run command when using UPIDOWN commands the output frequency accelerates to the frequency reference lower limits set in d2 02 When using UP DOWN commands multi step operations are disabled When d4 01 Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection is set to 1 the frequency reference value using the UP DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF When the power sup ply is turned ON and the run command is input the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been stored To reset i e to 0 Hz the stored frequency reference turn ON the UP or DOWN command while the run command is OFF ilConnection Example and Time Chart The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi function Digital Input terminal S3 and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4 are shown below SetValue Multi function input terminal S3 Multi function input terminal S4 Inverter Forward oper er 81 ation Stop 4 g2 Reverse opera tion Stop dent S3 Up comman
207. ltage E1 10 startup Name Parameter Factory Set Recommended Adjustment Method Number ting Setting Controlling hunting Reduce the setting 1f torque 1s Hunting prevention vibration in middle 1 00 0 50 to 2 00 insufficient for heavy loads gain N1 02 range speeds 10 to d ncrease the setting if hunting or 40 Hz vibration occurs for light loads Reducing motor mag Increase the setting if motor Carrier frequency selec netic noise Oto magnetic noise is high Controlling hunting capacit default Reduce the setting if hunting or C6 02 and vibration at low vibration occurs at low to mid speeds dle range speeds ncreasing torque and Reduce the setting 1f torque or Torque compensation speed response Depends on speed response is slow primary delay time con 200 to 1000 ms Controlling hunting capacity ncrease the setting if hunting or stant C4 02 NE SAN and vibration vibration occurs p Improving torque at Increase the setting if torque is low speeds 10 Hz or nbi Torque compensation insufficient at low speeds lower 1 00 0 50 to 1 50 Le yz gain C4 01 Reduce the setting if hunting or Controlling hunting SA E vibration occurs for light loads and vibration Middle output fre quency voltage Improving torque at Depends Increase the setting if torque is E1 08 low speeds Default to Default ins
208. m output frequency to be 100 Normally it is added to the PI output value If differential PI feed back is selected H3 09 16 it is added to the difference between both feedback values Set the filter time constant for the PI control output in b5 08 to prevent machinery resonance when machinery friction is great or rigidity is poor In this case set the constant to be higher than the resonance frequency cycle duration Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness Using b5 09 the PI output polarity can be inverted If now the PI target value increases the output fre quency will be lowered This function is usable e g for vacuum pumps Using b5 10 a gain can be applied to the PI control output Enable this parameter to adjust the amount of compensation if adding PI control output to the frequency reference as compensation b5 01 3 When PI control output is negative you can use parameter b5 11 to determine what happens to the inverter output When b1 04 Prohibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 or 3 enabled however the PI output is limited to 0 Using the b5 17 parameter the PI target value can be raised or lowered with an accel decel ramp function PI soft starter The normally used accel decel function 1 0 parameters is allocated after PI control so that depend ing on the settings resonance with the PI control and hunting in the machinery may occur Using b5 17 this behaviour can be prevented
209. maximum output from the terminal is 10V Monitor selection terminal AM Sets the number of the monitor item to be output U1 OD at terminal AM Gain terminal AM Sets the voltage level gain for multi function ana log output 2 Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 10V output at terminal AM Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V Bias terminal AM Sets the multi function analog output 2 voltage level bias Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 0V output at terminal AM The maximum output from the terminal is 10V Analog output 1 signal level selection FM Sets the signal output level for multi function out put 1 terminal FM 0 0 to 10 V output 2 4 to 20 mA Analog output signal 2 level selection AM Sets the signal output level for multi function out put 2 terminal AM 0 0 to 10 V output 2 4 to 20 mA E Selecting Analog Monitor Items Some of the digital operator monitor items U1 LILI status monitor can be output at the multi function ana log output terminals FM AC and AM AC Refer to Chapter 5 User Parameters and set the parameter num ber of U1 group O00 part of 01 00 for the parameters H4 01 respectively H4 04 E Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items Adjust the output voltage for multi function analog output terminals FM AC and AM AC using the gain and bias in H4 02 H4 03 H4 05 and H4 06 The gain s
210. maximum time for boost operation is set in b5 26 Wake up The inverter resumes the normal PI operation when the PI feedback exceeds the wake up level b5 24 The normal acceleration ramp is used PI Setpoint Setpoint Boost b5 25 time PI Feedback b 0 A EB PI Setpoint 65 25 Wake Up Level b5 24 time SFS Output Freq 2 2 L R Snooze Delay t b5 23 b5 23 lt gt normal accel ramp Snooze Level 65 22 time i 7 Normal P Normal PI operation Boost Snooze X operation i i Fig 6 53 PI Snooze Time Chart Using the parameter b5 21 either sleep operation or snooze operation can be enabled It is impossible to INFO enable both functions at the same time i Square Root Feedback Operation If parameter b5 28 is set to 1 the feedback value is converted into a value that equals the square root of the actual feedback This can be used to control the flow rate when a pressure sensor is used to generate a feed back value With parameter b5 29 the square root can be multiplied with a factor Following formula applies flow rate gain b5 29 x Jpressure head So linear connection between the PI target value and the feedback can be realized With parameter b5 30 also the feedback monitor can be switched to show a square root value of the actual feedback E Multifunc
211. motor phase Normally the 3 resistors 1 for each phase are connected in series Operation during Motor Overheating The operation when the motor overheats can be selected using the parameters L1 03 and L1 04 Set the motor temperature input filter time parameter in L1 05 If the motor overheats the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital Operator Error Codes If the Motor Overheats Inverter stops or continues to operate according to the setting in L1 03 Inverter stops according to the setting in L1 04 The fault contact is activated By setting H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection to E Motor temperature input the motor temperature can be detected and OH3 respectively OH4 can be output if the motor overheats The terminal connections that are to be used are shown in Fig 6 27 i Inverter Multi function lt M1 Fault contact digital input M2 Output 9 M3 Multi function toV M4 contact output 45V 20mA Branch resistance if MA Multi function 18 MB contact output MC I O A2 0 10V PTC thermistor p Theresistance value of 18 is only valid when a 3 phase with the characteristic shown on the previous page is used Fig 6 27 Terminal Connections for Motor Overheating Protection Setting Precautions Because this function uses a voltage signal to terminal A2 pin 2 of the DIP switch S1 on the control terminal
212. mum frequency as follows Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency 1 the lower levels of the jog frequency multi step speed frequency and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted 6 Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting Frequency reference lower Set the output frequency lower limit taking the limit base reference to be 100 Master speed reference lower Set the master speed reference lower limit taking limit the max output frequency to be 100 Frequency Detection Speed Agreement Function There are four different types of frequency detection methods available The digital multifunction outputs 1 to M4 can be programmed for this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to any external equipment Related Parameters Parame Setting Factory Change Range Setting ter Num Description ber during Operation Effective when fout fset agree 1 Frequency detection 1 or Frequency detection 2 is set for a multi function output Speed agreement detection level Effective when fief fout agree 1 four Speed agreement detection ao ref 48 Tout width agree 1 Frequency detection 1 or Frequency detection 2 is set for a multi function output With L4 01 an a
213. n Card Operation method selection Selects stopping method when stop com mand is sent Stopping method 0 Deceleration to stop selection 1 Coast to stop 2 DC braking stop 3 Coast to stop with timer Sets the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to climb from 0 to 0 0 to 6000 0 10095 Sets the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100 to 0 0 to 6000 0 096 Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 Parameter Number Carrier frequency selection Table 4 1 Basic Parameter Settings Description Sets the carrier frequency The factory setting and setting range depends on the setting of C6 01 Must be set O Set as required Setting Range Factory Setting Depends on setting of C6 01 d1 01 to 91 04 and 41 17 Frequency refer ences 1 to 4 and jog frequency ref erence Sets the required speed references for multi step speed operation or jogging 0 to 200 00 Hz 41 01 to d1 04 0 00 Hz d1 17 6 00 Hz Input voltage set ting Sets the Inverter s nominal input voltage in volts 155to 255 V 200 V class 310to 510 V 400 V class 200 V 200 V class 400 V 400 V class Motor rated cur rent Sets the motor rated current 10 to 200 of Inverter s rated current Setting for general purpose motor of same capacity as Inverter FM and AM ter minal output gain
214. n Operation Example 6 84 Using PI Control PI control is a method of making the feedback value detection value match the set target value By combin ing proportional control P and integral control I you can even control system with load fluctuation The characteristics of the PI control operations are given below P element o ME not possible to eliminate the deviation completely I element 0 I element together the deviation can be eliminated completely BPID Control Operation The output of a P element is proportional to the input deviation With using a P element alone it is The output of an I element is the time integral of the input deviation With using a P element and an To understand the differences between the PI control operations P and I the output share of each operation is shown in the following diagram when the deviation i e the difference between the target value and feedback value is fixed Deviation Time PI control Output of P and control l element P control Time Fig 6 49 PI Control Operation Control Applications The following table shows examples of PI control applications using the Inverter Application Control Details Pressure Con trol Pressure information is fed back and constant pressure control is performed Example of Sensor Used Pressure sensor Flow Rate Con trol Flow rate information is fed back and the flow rate is c
215. n has stopped Replace the cooling fan Contact your Omron Yaskawa Motion Con trol representative Motor overheating H3 09 is set to E and the motor temperature thermistor input exceeded the alarm detection level The motor has overheated Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration decelera tion and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the motor temperature input on terminal A2 Overtorque 1 There has been a torque higher than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the time in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the over torque External error detected for Commu nications Card other than SI K2 Continuing operation was specified for F6 03 3 and an external fault was input from the Option Card Remove the cause of the external fault Display Meaning External fault Input terminal S3 External fault Input terminal S4 External fault Input terminal S5 External fault Input terminal S6 External fault Input terminal S7 Probable causes An external fault was input from a multi function input terminal S3 to S7 Corrective Actions Remove the cause of the external fault PI Feedback Lost A PI feedback loss detection is enabled b5 12 0 and the PI feed back input was less than b5 13 PI feedbac
216. nal is turned ON and operation will continue at this frequency The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference ON ON ON Sample hold command i gt 100 4 w0 4 100 4 imsec imsec imsec Analog input E Frequency reference a Fig 6 40 Sample Hold Analog Frequency iPrecautions When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references observe the following precau tions Setting Precautions When using sample hold of analog frequency reference you cannot use the following commands at the same time Otherwise operation error invalid multi function input selection will occur Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold command UP DOWN command 6 Trim Control Increase Decrease command Application Precautions When performing sample hold of analog frequency reference be sure to close the digital input for 100 ms or more If the sample hold time 15 less than 100 ms the frequency reference will not be held The frequency reference value that is held will be deleted when the power supply 1s turned OFF 6 57 6 Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card The source of frequency reference and RUN command can be switched between a Communication option card and the sources selected in b1 01 and b1 02 Set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital inputdigital inputs S3 to S7 function sel
217. nalog Output Cannot be output Cumulative oper ation time Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter The initial value and the operat ing time power ON time selection can be set in 02 07 and 02 08 Cannot be output Software No flash memory Manufacturer s ID number Cannot be output Terminal Al input level Monitors the input level of analog input Al A value of 100 corre sponds to 10V input 10 V 100 0 to 10 V possible Terminal A2 input level Monitors the input level of analog input A2 A value of 100 corre sponds to 10V 20mA input 10 V 20mA 100 0 to 10 V possible Motor secondary current Iq Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current The motor rated current corre sponds to 100 10 V Motor rated current 0 to 10 V output Output fre quency after soft starter SFS out put Monitors the frequency reference after the soft starter This frequency value does not include compensations such as slip compensation The unit is set in 01 03 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible PI feedback value Monitors the feedback value when PI control is used 10 V 100 feedback value 0 to 10 V possible Software No CPU CPU software No Cannot be output MWh display Monitors the 5 higher digits MWh display Cannot be output kWh display Monitors the 4 lo
218. nces 0 025 50 Hz 11 bits plus sign Output frequency resolu tion 0 01 Hz Frequency setting signal 0 to 10V 4 to 20 mA Acceleration Decelera tion time 0 01 to 6000 0 s 2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Braking torque Approximately 20 Main control functions Restarting for momentary power loss speed searches overtorque detection 5 speed control maximum acceleration decel eration time changes S curve acceleration 3 wire control autotuning cooling fan ON OFF control torque compensation jump frequencies upper and lower limits for frequency references DC braking for starting and stopping high slip braking PI control with sleep function energy saving control MEMOBUS communications RS 485 422 19 2 kbps maximum fault reset and copy function Protective functions Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay Instantaneous overcurrent protection Stops at approx 200 of rated output current Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown Overload protection 120 of rated output current for 1 minute Overvoltage protection 200 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 410 V 400 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 820 V Undervoltage protection 200 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 190 V 400 Class Inverter Stops w
219. nd the fixed value A001H At the end of the calcula tion the data word contains the checksum value The checksum is calculated in the following way 1 The starting value of the 16 Bit data word that is used for the calculation has to be set to FFFFH 2 An Exclusive OR operation has to be performed with the starting value and the slave address 3 The result has to be shifted to the right until the overflow bit becomes 1 4 When this bit becomes 1 an Esclusive OR operation with the result of step 3 and the fix value A001H has to be performed 5 After 8 shift operations every time when the overflow bit becomes 1 an Exclusive OR like in step 4 has to be done perform an Exclusive OR operation with the result of the former operations and the next data package 8 bit function code Again the result of this operation has to be shifted 8 times and 1f needed it has to be interconnected with the fix value A001H using an Exclusive OR operation 6 The same steps have to be performed with the data first with the higher byte and then with the lower byte until all data are proceeded 7 The result of these operations is the checksum It consists of a high and a low byte 6 70 The following example clarifies the calculation method It shows the calculation of a CRC 16 code with the slave address 02H 0000 0010 and the function code 03H 0000 0011 The resulting CRC 16 code is DIH for the lower and 40H for the higher byte The example calcu
220. ne cov ered vinyl sheath cable B Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table Wire Size mm AWG 0 25 24 Table 2 8 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes AI 0 25 8YE Manufacturer 0 5 20 AI 0 5 3WH 0 75 18 AI 0 75 8GY Phoenix Contact 1 25 16 AI 1 5 8BK 2 14 iaWiring Method AI 2 5 8BU 8mm ES di 14 mm L qu Fig 2 9 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block 1 Loosen the terminal screws with a thin slot screwdriver 2 Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block 3 Tighten the terminal screws firmly Strip the end for 7 mm if no solder 1 less terminal is used 4 Wires Screwdriver Blade of screwdriver Control circuit terminal block Solderless terminal or wire 3 5 mm max without soldering Blade thickness 0 6 mm max Fig 2 10 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block Control Circuit Terminal Functions The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2 9 Use the appropriate terminals for the cor rect purposes Digital input signals Table 2 9 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings Signal Name Forward run stop command Function Forward run when ON stopped when OFF Reverse run stop command Rever
221. nverter or Option Card is faulty Replace the Option Card or the Inverter ASIC internal RAM fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter Watchdog timer fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPU ASIC mutual diagnosis fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter ASIC version fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter Display Meaning Communications Option Card A D converter error Probable Causes The Option Card is not connected properly Corrective Actions Turn off the power and insert the Card again The Option Card s A D converter is faulty Replace the Communications Option Card Communications Option Card self diagnostic error Communications Option Card model code error Communications Option Card DPRAM error Communications Option Card fault Replace the Option Card Alarm Detection Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output The system will automatically returned to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm can be output at the multi functi
222. o H1 05 multi function digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection to perform baseblock commands using the terminal s ON OFF operation and thereby to block the inverter output Clear the baseblock command to restart the operation using the speed search method set in b3 01 speed search selection Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set Value Function 8 External baseblock NO Normally Open contact Baseblock when ON 9 External baseblock NC Normally Closed contact Baseblock when OFF i Time Chart The time chart when using a baseblock command is shown below N Forward operation Stop OFT j Cleared Baseblock command Frequency reference Speed searen Output frequency Coast to a stop Fig 6 36 Baseblock Commands P P P When a contactor between inverter and motor is used always perform a base block command before opening the contactor IMPORTANT Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable Enable If a digital input is programmed for this function 0 C the analog input A2 can be enabled or disabled by switching the digital input ON OFF ON Analog Input A2 enabled Drive Enable Disable If a digital input is programmed for this function HI LIL 6A the drive can be enabled or disabled by switching the digital input ON OFF ON Drive enabled If the input is switched OFF while a RUN command is active the inverter will stop using the stopping metho
223. o perform DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second Used to stop coasting motor and restart it When the set value is 0 DC injection braking at start is not performed DC injection braking time at stop Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of 1 second Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is input When the set value is 0 00 DC injection braking at stop is not performed Motor pre heat current Sets the DC current level when the motor pre heat function is enabled using a digital input ilSpeed Search b3 Speed search selection current detection or speed calcula tion Description Enables disables the speed search function for the RUN command and sets the speed search method 0 Disabled speed calculation 1 Enabled speed calculation 2 Disabled current detection 3 Enabled current detection Speed Calculation When the search is started the motor speed is calculated and acceleration deceleration is per formed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency motor direction is also searched Current Detection The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost and the maxi mum frequency and the speed is detected at the search current level Setting Range MEMO BUS Register Speed search operating current current detec tion Sets the speed search ope
224. ogrammed for this function the output 1s switched ON when an inverter overheat alarm has occurred and the motor is running at reduced speed BRUN Command from Option Card Communication Option Setting 3B If a multifunction output is set to 3B the output will be ON when the RUN command is put in from the built in communication Memobus N2 PI OR from a communication option card SI P1 SI N1 etc If both RUN commands are off the output will be open E Drive Waiting Setting 39 The digital output will close during the timeout period between the input of a RUN command and the expiring of the delay time specified by b1 11 Y Monitor Parameters This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor parameters Using the Analog Monitor Parameters Related Parameters Param eter Number Monitor selection terminal FM Description Sets the number of the monitor item to be output U1 OD at terminal FM Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Access Level Gain terminal FM Sets the multi function analog output 1 FM volt age level gain Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 10V output at terminal FM Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V Bias terminal FM Sets the multi function analog output 1 voltage level bias Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 0V output at terminal FM The
225. olated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation Safety Extra Low Voltage 1 Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below su sc sHA1 a2 v c v jac E MA MB Ec s1 s2 ss s4 ss se s FM ac s s ms m m 2 2 The output current capability of the V terminal is 20 mA 3 Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single cir cles 4 The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transistors 0V common and sinking mode This is the default setting For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply refer to page 2 23 Sinking Sourc ing Mode 5 The master speed frequency reference can be input either at terminal A1 or at terminal A2 by changing the setting of parameter H3 13 The default setting is terminal A2 6 DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 300 kW A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18 5 kW or less Remove the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor _ Terminal Block Configuration The terminal arrangements are shown in Fig 2 3 and Fig 2 4 susce L Control circuit terminals EG S1s2 s3
226. on error detection and autotuning error detection Fault Detection When the Inverter detects a fault the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is switched OFF causing the motor to coast to stop The stopping method can be selected for some faults A fault code is dis played on the Digital Operator When a fault has occurred refer to the following table to identify the fault and to correct the causes Use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter Seta multi function contact input H1 01 to H1 05 to 14 Fault Reset and turn ON the error reset signal Press the RESET key on the Digital Operator Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again Display Meaning Overcurrent The Inverter output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level Probable Causes A short circuit or ground fault occurred at the Inverter output A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage worn insu lation or a damaged cable The load is too large or the accelera tion time is too short A special purpose motor or motor with a capacity that is too large for the Inverter is used A magnetic switch was switched at the Inverter output while running Corrective Actions Reset the fault after correcting its cause Ground Fault The ground fault current at the Inverter output exceeded approxi mately 50 of the Inverter rated outp
227. on is effective only when the optional HOA operator JVOP 162 is used has no effect on the optional LCD operator JVOP 160 OY E Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON 01 02 Using parameter 01 02 the monitor item U1 LI1L1 that is to be displayed on the Digital Operator when the power supply is turned ON can be selected i Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units 01 03 Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using parameter 01 03 The setting in 01 03 will affect the display units of the following monitor items UI 01 Frequency Reference 01 02 Output Frequency U1 05 Motor Speed 01 20 Output Frequency after Soft Start d1 01 to 41 04 Frequency references _ BDisabling the LOCAL REMOTE Key 02 01 Set 02 01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator If the key is disabled it cannot be used anymore to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN command source between LOCAL and REMOTE iDisabling the STOP Key 02 02 This parameter is used to set whether the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control 61 02 z 0 or not If 02 02 is set to 1 a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted If 02 02 is set to 0 it will be disregarded Bnitializing Changed Parameter Values 02 03 You can save the current Inverter parameter setting values as user set parameter initial values
228. on of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation Trial Operation Procedure Trial Operation Adjustment Suggestions Trial Operation Procedure Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart START Installation Wiring Set power supply voltage 1 Turn ON power Confirm status Basic settings Select operating Quick programming mode method Set E1 03 default 200V 50Hz 400V 50Hz Motor cable over 50 m or heavy load possibly YES causing motor to stall or overload NO Y Stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only lt Application settings Advanced programming mode No load operation 1 Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more tH Loaded operation Optimum adjustments and parameter settings Check record parameters END Fig 4 1 Trial Operation Flowchart Trial Operation The procedure for the trial operation 1s described in order in this section Application Confirmation First confirm the application before using the Inverter It is designed for Fan blower pump Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher The power supply voltage jumper must be set for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or
229. on outputs H2 01 or H2 02 When an alarm occurs take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below Display Meaning Forward Reverse Run Commands Input Together Both the forward and reverse run commands have been ON for more than 0 5 s Probable causes Corrective Actions Check the sequence of the forward and reverse run commands Since the rotational direction is unknown the motor will be deceler ated to a stop when this minor fault Occurs Main Circuit Undervoltage The following conditions occurred when there was no Run signal The main circuit DC voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection Level Setting L2 05 The inrush current limiting resis tor bypass contactor opened The control power supply voltage was below the CUV level See causes for UV1 UV2 and UV3 faults in the previous table See corrective actions for UV1 UV2 and UV3 faults in the previous table Main Circuit Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level 200 V class Approx 400 V 400 V class Approx 800 V The power supply voltage is too high Decrease the voltage so it s within specifications Cooling Fin Overheating The temperature of the Inverter s cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8 02 The ambient temperature is too high Install a cooling unit There is a heat source nearby Remove the heat source The Inverter cooling fa
230. onstant Torque Characteristic Application These patterns are used in general applications where the load torque is fixed regardless of rota tion speed e g for linear transport systems Specifications 50 Hz specifications 60 Hz specifications 60 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 50 Hz 72 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz Variable torque characteristic These patterns are used for loads with torque proportional to the square or cube of the rotation speed such as fans and pumps 50 Hz specifications cubical torque characteris tic 50 Hz specifications quadratic torque character istic 60 Hz specifications cubical torque characteris tic 60 Hz specifications quadratic torque character istic High Startup Torque Select a high startup torque V f pattern only in the following cases The wiring distance between Inverter and motor is large approx 150 m min A large torque is required at startup An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter input or output 50 Hz specifications medium startup torque 50 Hz specifications large startup torque 60 Hz specifications medium startup torque 60 Hz specifications large startup torque Fixed Output Oper ation This pattern is used for frequencies of 60 Hz or higher A fixed voltage is applied 90 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz 120 Hz specifications voltage sa
231. ontroled with high accuracy Flow rate sensor Temperature Temperature information is fed back and a temperature adjustment control using a fan can Control be performed Thermocouple Thermistor m Related Parameters PI control mode selection Description 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 PI control enabled frequency reference PI output Setting Range Factory Setting Proportional gain P Sets P control proportional gain P control is not performed when the setting is 0 00 Integral I time Sets I control integral time in 1 second units I control is not performed when the setting is 0 0 Integral I limit Sets the I control limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PI limit Sets the limit after PI control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PI offset adjustment Sets the offset after PI control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PI delay time constant Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PI control outputs in 1 second units Usually not necessary to set PI output characteristics selection Selects forward reverse direction for PI output 0 PI output is forward 1 PI output is reverse PI output gain Sets output gain PI reverse output selection 0 Limit to 0 when PI output is negative 1 Reverses when PI output is negative Limit to 0 is also active when reverse prohibit is selected by
232. or a standard domestic European Inverter 3 phase 400 VAC 0 55 kW IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 standards inventer model gcc MODEL CIMR E7Z40P4 SPEC 40P41 Inputspecifcatons i de INPUT AC3PH 380 480V 50 60Hz 2 34A TD Output specifications OUTPUT AC3PH 0 480V 0 200Hz 1 8A 1 4kVA Lot number LOT NO MASS 3 0kg a Mass Serial number SER NO PRG IP20 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION Fig 1 1 Nameplate Einverter Model Numbers The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification voltage class and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes CIMR E7 Z 2 0 P4 Inverter Varispeed E7 Specification European Standard Voltage Class AC Input 3 phase 200 V AC Input 3 phase 400 V P Indicates the decimal point Fig 1 2 Inverter Model Numbers Binverter Specifications The Inverter specifications SPEC on the nameplate indicate the voltage class maximum motor capacity the protective structure and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes Voltage Class AC Input 3 phase 200 V AC Input 3 phase 400 V No Protective Structure Open chassis IEC IP00 Enclosed wall mounted IEC IP20 NEMA Type 1 P Indicates the decimal point Fig 1 3 Inverter Specifications Component Names B Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less The external appearance and component
233. orque compensation gain so that at minimum speed the output current does not exceed the Inverter rated output current Torque compen C4 01 sation gain The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units Usually setting is not necessary dones Adjust under the following circum q P stances 0 to 4 11 ome When the motor is oscillating 10000 UN 2106H 6 27 increase the set values When the responsiveness of the motor is low decrease the set values B Carrier Frequency C6 Carrier fre quency selection Description Selects the carrier frequency Select F to enable detailed settings using parameters C6 03 to C6 05 Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Carrier fre quency upper limit Carrier fre quency lower limit Carrier fre quency propor tional gain Sets the carrier frequency upper limit and lower limit in kHz units The carrier frequency gain is set as fol lows Carrier frequency Output frequency x C6 05 x K Output fre E1 04 quency Max output frequency K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6 03 C6 03 gt 10 0 kHz K 3 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 gt 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz gt C6 03 K 1 e factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter is parameter can be monitored or set only when C6 02 is set to F
234. orrect settings The Inverter capacity setting doesn t match the Unit Check parameter 02 04 for the correct setting Parameter setting range error The parameter setting is outside of the valid setting range Multi function input selection error One of the following errors has been made in the multi function input H1 01 to H1 05 settings The same setting has been selected for two or more multi function inputs An up or down command was selected separately They must be used together The up down commands 10 and 11 and Accel Decel Ramp Hold A were selected at the same time Speed Search 1 61 and Speed Search 2 62 were selected at the same time for a digital input External Baseblock NO 8 and External Baseblock NC 9 were selected at the same time The up down commands 10 and 11 were selected while PI Control b5 01 was enabled The emergency stop command NO and NC have been set at the same time Option Card selection error The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1 01 to 3 but an Option Card isn t connected PI control selection error The following settings have been made at the same time b5 01 PI Control Mode Selection has been set to a value other than 0 b5 15 PI Sleep Function Operation Level has been set to a value other than 0 1 03 Stopping Method Selection has been set to 2 or 3 V f data setting error Parameters E1 04
235. ory setting is 150 overload for 1 min If the motor overload capability is known set the overload resistance protection time during hot start to L1 02 Motor protection time con stant The settings range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0 4 kW 2 Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0 4 kW Multi Function Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Set Value Motor overload OL1 including OH3 pre alarm ON 90 or more of the detection level iSetting Motor Rated Current E2 01 Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2 01 for motor 1 This set value is the base current for the internal thermal overload calculation Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics L1 01 Set the overload protection function in L1 01 according to the application Set L1 01 to 0 to disable the thermal motor protection function 1 to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor self cooled iSetting Motor Protection Operation Time L1 02 Set the motor protection operation time in L1 02 The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150 overload when it was running with the rated load before 1 e operating temperature was reached before applying the 150 over load Set the motor protection operation
236. ot a communica tions time out is to be detected as a communications error 0 Do not detect 1 Detect Send wait time Sets the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the Inverter starts to send RTS control ON OFF Enables or disables RTS control 0 Disabled RTS is always ON 1 Enabled RTS turns ON only when sending Communications Selection Selects the Protocol for the Com munication 0 Memobus CE detection time Sets the time before CE error Communication error is detected when MEMOBUS communication is used Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications Protection Function Parameters L Motor Overload L1 Param eter Number Motor protection selection Description Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay 0 Disabled 1 General purpose motor protec tion fan cooled motor When several motors are con nected to one Inverter set to 0 and ensure that each motor is installed with a protection device Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register Motor protection time constant Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units Usually changing this setting is not necessary The factory setting is 150 over load for one minute When the motor s overload capa bility is known also set the
237. overshoot occurs reduce Proportional gain P and increase integral time T Response Before adjustment K v After adjustment Time Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs reduce integral time I Response Before adjustment v After adjustment Time 6 88 Suppressing Long cycle Vibration If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time set value lengthen the integral time I to sup press the vibration Response Before adjustment K After adjustment Time Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration If short cycle vibration occurs reduce the proportional gain P or increase the PI primary delay time constant Response Before adjustment v After adjustment Time i Setting Precautions In PI control the b5 04 parameter is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a 6 specified amount When the load varies rapidly the Inverter response 1s delayed and the machine might get be damaged or the motor may stall In this case reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response The b5 06 parameter is used to prevent the output value of the the PI control calculation from exceeding a specified amount The value is set taking the maximum output frequency as 100 The b5 07 parameter is used to adjust PI control offset The value is set in increments of 0 1 taking the maximu
238. per centage of the maximum output fre quency PI delay time constant Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PI control output Usually not necessary to set PI output char acteristics selec tion Selects forward reverse direction for PI output 0 PI output is forward 1 PI output is reverse PI output gain Sets output gain PI reverse out put selection 0 Limit to 0 when PI output is negative 1 Reverses when PI output is negative Limit to 0 is also active when reverse prohibit is selected by b1 04 Selection of PI feedback signal loss detection 0 No detection of PI feedback loss 1 Detection of PI feedback loss Operation continues during detection the fault contact is not operated 2 Detection of PI feedback loss The motor coasts to stop at detection and the fault contact operates PI feedback loss detection level Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as percentage using the maximum output frequency as 100 PI feedback loss detection time Sets the PI feedback loss detection time Sleep function operation level Sets the sleep function start level as a fre quency Sleep operation delay time Sets the delay time until the sleep func tion starts Accel decel time for PI ref erence Sets the accel decel time for the PI Soft starter SFS PI Setpoint Selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PI Setpoint
239. peration continues at the frequency set in parameter L4 06 Frequency reference loss means that the frequency reference value drops over 90 in 400 ms Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Frequency ref erence value at frequency refer ence loss Sets the frequency reference value when the frequency reference is missing 0 0 to 100 0 Number of auto restart attempts Sets the number of auto restart attempts Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run fre quency Fault Retry time Sets the maximum time the restart is tried Torque detec tion selection 0 Overtorque undertorque detection dis abled Overtorque detection only with speed agreement operation continues warn ing is output Overtorque detected continuously during operation operation continues warning is output Overtorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection Overtorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon detection Undertorque detection only with speed agreement operation continues warning is output Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues warning is output Undertorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection Undertorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon detection Torque detec tion level
240. pply circuits A200 2200 circuits ril Note Consult your Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative before using 12 phase rectification Standard Connection Diagrams Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2 5 These are the same for both 200 V Class and 400 V Class Inverters The connections depend on the Inverter capacity BCIMR E7Z20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to 4018 BCIMR E7Z22022 2030 and 4022 to 4055 Braking Resistor Braking Resistor Unit optional 1 r 4 Unit optional Braking Unit a Braking Unit op optional 4 5 rena nit op LO 1 2 GI O30 L1 P RAI Um lt L1 RAT um L2 E os L2 582 VE a L3 LUE IM L3 2 TA3 W T3 c 3 phase 200 T L3 3 phase 200 VAC RYLTI VAG 400 VAC 400 VAC 551 21 O nA31 a i The DC reactor is built in Be sure to remove the short circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor BCIMR E7Z2037 to 2110 BCIMR E7Z24075 to 4300 Braking Resistor Braking Resistor Unit optional Unit optional Braking Unit op Braking Unit op L1 ai lt mL un it L1 d P 1 um b L2 E 3 e 0 502 amp L2 5512 Wi2 W L3 E 4 113 WIT3 d L3 E 1 d A mm ERES Tad S121 PO 1321 A8 TIA31 3 1 1 61 A200 2 200
241. put was less than b5 13 PI feedback loss detection level for longer than the time set in b5 14 PI feedback loss detection time Check the PI feedback signal source for correct operation Check the wiring External fault input from Commu nications Option Card Check the Communications Option Card and communications signals External fault Input terminal 3 External fault Input terminal 4 External fault Input terminal 5 External fault Input terminal 6 External fault Input terminal 7 An external fault was input from a multi function input terminal S3 to S7 Remove the cause of the external fault Digital Operator Connection Fault The connection to the Digital Operator was broken during opera tion using the operator as RUN command source Check the connection to the Digi tal Operator Display Meaning MEMOBUS Communications Error A normal receive was not possible for 2 s or longer after control data were received once Probable Causes Corrective Actions Check the communications devices and communications sig nals Option Communications Error A communications error was detected during a run command or while setting a frequency reference from a Communications Option Card Check the communications devices and communications sig nals Digital Operator Communications Error 1 Communications with the Digital Operator were not establi
242. r loss time exceeds the time set in L2 02 an UV1 alarm DC bus undervoltage will be detected If L2 01 is set to 2 the inverter will restart when the main power supply is recovered as long as the control power supply 1 e power supply to the control circuit is maintained Consequently alarm UV1 DC bus und ervoltage will not be detected Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level 0 Disabled DC bus undervoltage UV detection 1 Enabled Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2 02 When L2 02 is exceeded DC bus undervoltage detection 2 Enabled while CPU is operating Restarts when power returns during control operations Does not detect DC bus undervoltage Momentary power loss detec tion Momentary power loss ride Ridethrough time when momentary power loss thru time selection L2 01 is set to 1 Sets the Inverter s minimum baseblock time when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ride through Sets the time to approximately 0 7 times of the motor time constant When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking increase the set values Min baseblock BB time Sets the time required to return the Inverter output Voltage recovery time voltage from 0 V to normal voltage at the comple tion of a speed search Sets the main circuit undervoltage UV detection level m
243. r Frequency Using the following parameters the carrier frequency setting can be fitted to the applications requirements Related Parameters Changes Setting Factory During Access Range Setting Opera Level tion No Param Details eter No Selects the carrier frequency Select F to enable detailed settings using parameters C6 03 to C6 05 Carrier frequency selec tion Carrier frequency upper Sets the upper and lower carrier frequency limits in kHz limit Set the carrier wave gain as shown below Carrier frequency lower Carrier frequency limit Output frequenoy x C6 05 xK Output frequency E1 04 Maximum output frequency Carrier frequency propor tional gain K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6 03 C6 03 210 0 kHz 3 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 2 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz gt C6 03 K 1 1 The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity 2 The setting ranges depend on the Inverter capacity 3 Can be set and referenced only when C6 02 is set to F When selecting the carrier frequency observe the following precautions 1 Ifthe wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long Set the carrier frequency low Use the following values as guidelines Wiring Length 100 m or less Over 100 m C6 02 ee 0 to 6 15 kHz 0 to 4 10 kHz 0 to 2 5 kHz f speed and torque vary at low speeds Set the carrier frequency low If
244. r Protection Inverter Overheat Protection The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off To prevent a suddenly and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an overtemperature an overheating pre alarm can be output The temperature level for that pre alarm can be set in parameter L8 02 Using parameter L8 03 the inverter operation when an overtemperature occurs can be selected Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre alarm in C The pre alarm is detected when the cooling fin temper ature reaches the set value Overheat pre alarm level Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat pre alarm goes ON 0 Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop in fast stop time C1 09 3 Continue operation Monitor display only 4 OH alarm and output frequency reduction L8 19 A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3 Inverter overheat OH pre alarm operation selection Frequency reference during Sets the frequency reference when OH pre alarm is OH pre alarm detected in percent of the maximum frequency 1 04 E Multifunction Output Settings H2 01 and H2 02
245. r disconnected Bit E ERR BitF OH4 Motor overheat PTC analog input Fault Content 3 Bit 0 CE Memobus communications error Bit 1 BUS Bus option communications error Bit 2 3 Not used Bit 4 CF Control fault Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 EFO External fault from optional input card Bit 7 FBL PI feedback loss 6 Bit 8 UL3 Undertorque detection 1 ERI Bit9 Not used Bit A OL7 High Slip Braking overload Bit B to F Not used CPF Fault Content 1 Bit 0 1 Not used Bit2 CPF02 Bit3 CPF03 Bit4 Not used Bit 5 CPF05 Bit 6 CPF06 Bit 7 to F Not used CPF Fault Content 2 Bit 0 CPF20 Bit 1 CPF21 Bit 2 CPF22 Bit 3 CPF23 Bit 4 to F Not used 6 76 Alarm Content 1 Contents Register No Bit 0 UV DC bus undervoltage Bit 1 OV DC bus overvoltage Bit 2 OH Inverter heatsink overheat pre alarm Bit 3 OH2 Inverter overheat alarm input by a digital input Bit 4 OL3 Overtorque detection 1 Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 EF Forward Reverse input set at the same time Bit 7 BB Baseblock active Bit 8 EF3 External alarm set on terminal S3 Bit 9 EF4 External alarm set on terminal S4 Bit A EF5 External alarm set on terminal S5 Bit B EF6 External alarm set on terminal S6 Bit C EF7 External alarm set on terminal S7 Bit D E Not used Bit F OS Overspeed alarm Alarm Content 2 Bit
246. r frequen cies are set in the following manner E1 04 FMAX gt E1 06 FA gt E1 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN Mid output fre quency 2 Mid output fre quency voltage 2 Set only to fine adjust V f for the out put range Normally this setting is not required Base voltage VBASE Sets the output voltage of the base fre quency E1 06 These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double 2 1 11 and 1 12 are disregarded when set to 0 0 3 1 13 is set to the same value as E1 05 by autotuning iMotor Setup E2 MEMO Setting Factory BUS Description Range Setting Register Sets the motor rated current This set value will become the ref Motor rated cur erence value for motor protection rent and torque limits This parameter is an input data for autotuning Sets the motor no load current This parameter is automatically set during autotuning Motor no load current Sets the motor phase to phase Motor line to line resistance in Q units resistance This parameter is automatically set during autotuning 1 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0 4 kW is g
247. r is switched an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit causing the inverter unit to break down To prevent this install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac tor connection terminals This also improves the power factor on the power supply side Installing a Surge Absorber Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter These inductive loads include mag netic contactors electromagnetic relays solenoid valves solenoids and magnetic brakes EWiring the Output Side of Main Circuit Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits Connecting the Inverter and Motor Connect output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 respective to the motor lead wires U V and W Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command Switch over any two of the output termi nals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals Never connect a power supply to output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 If voltage is applied to the output terminals the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged Never Short or Ground Output Terminals If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter cas ing an electric shock or grounding may occur This is extremely hazardous Do
248. r rated current Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration L3 02 rated current 1 50 of inverter x 1 1 1 1 06 Output frequency Base Frequency FA Fig 6 20 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the DC bus voltage to avoid over voltage tripping Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Factory Setting 0 Disabled Motor decelerates according to set ting When the deceleration time is too short there is a risk of DC bus overvoltage OV Stall prevention selection dur occurring ing deceleration function 1 Enabled selection 2 Optimum adjustment If using the dynamic brake option braking resistor units and braking units be sure to set parameter L3 04 to 0 i Setting the Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration L3 04 There are four different settings selectable for L3 04 L3 04 0 This setting disables the stall prevention function during deceleration The motor will be decelerated using the time set in C1 02 C1 04 If the load inertia is very high and an OV fault occurs during deceleration a Braking option has to be used or the time has to be lengthened
249. rameters are the only acces sible parameters if Parameter Access Level is set to user parame ters A1 01 1 Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Access Level MEMO BUS Register 106H to 125H Application Parameters b BOperation Mode Selections b1 Param eter Number Reference source selection Description Sets the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal ana log input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level MEMO BUS Register RUN command source selection Sets the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal digital multifunction inputs 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Stopping method selection Used to set the stopping method used when a stop command is input 0 Deceleration to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC injection braking stop Stops faster than coast to stop no regenerative operation Coast to stop with timer Run commands are disregarded dur ing deceleration Prohibition of reverse operation Reverse enabled Reverse disabled Output Phase Rotation both rotational directions are ena bled Output Phase Rotation with Reverse prohibited Operation selec tion after switch ing to remote mode Used to set the operation mode by switching to the Remot
250. ration current as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current as 10096 Usually not necessary to set When restarting is not possible with the factory settings reduce the value Speed search deceleration time current detec tion Sets the output frequency decelera tion time during speed search in 1 second units Sets the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency Speed search wait time current detection or speed calcula tion When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momen tary power loss the search opera tion is delayed for the time set here Ife g a contactor is used at the out put side of the inverter set this parameter to the contactor delay time or more Bi directional speed search selection Can be used to turn off the bi directional capabilities of the speed calculation form of speed search Then speed search will only be per formed in the last known direction 0 Disabled 1 Enabled i Timer Function b4 Timer function ON delay time Description Sets the timer function output ON delay time dead time for the timer function input in 1 second units Enabled when a timer function is set in 1 and H2 LILI Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Timer function OFF delay time Control b5 Param eter Number PI control mode selection S
251. re Control Wiring Example 50 ms min Run command Can be either ON or OFF OFF Stop command stopped Forward reverse command OFF forward ON reverse Motor speed Stop Forward Reverse Stop orward Fig 6 11 Three wire Control Time Chart AS Use a control circuit that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command This will make INFO the run command self holding in the Inverter T Stopping Methods This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input Deceleration to stop e Coast to stop DC braking stop Coast to stop with timer Set parameter b1 03 to select the Inverter stopping method Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting Select stopping method when stop command is given 0 Deceleration to stop 1 Coast to stop Stopping method selection 2 DC braking stop Stops faster than coast to stop without regenerative operation Coast to stop with timer Run commands are ignored during deceleration time Set the frequency at which the DC injection brak Zero speed level DC injec ing starts in units of Hz when b1 03 is set to 0 tion braking starting fre deceleration to stop quency DC injection braking starts
252. re baseblock 2 After AC power supply recovery motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b2 03 Fig 6 32 Speed Search After Baseblock Current Detection Loss Time lt L2 03 Loss time longer than minimum baseblock time AC power supply Output frequency Output current Output frequency before power loss Set frequency reference Ji Deceleration speed set in b3 0 b3 02 Speed search operating time ta Speed search wait time b3 05 Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Fig 6 33 Speed Search After Baseblock Current Detection Loss Time gt L2 03 Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost The frequency reference loss detection function can be used to continue operation at reduced speed using the set value in parameter L4 06 as frequency reference value When using an analog input as frequency reference source a frequency reference loss is detected when the reference value drops over 90 in 400 ms or less When an error signal during frequency reference loss shall be output externally set H2 01 or H2 02 multi function contact output terminal M1 M2 and M3 MA function selection to C frequency reference lost m Related Parameters Param eter Number Operation when frequency reference is missing Description 0 Stop 1 Operation L4 06 fref before loss inverter runs with reduced speed Frequency referen
253. red until the Minimum Baseblock Time INFO L2 03 has elapsed EDC Braking Stop After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time L2 03 has elapsed DC injection will be applied to the motor The applied DC injection current is programmed in parameter b2 02 The DC injection brake time depends on the set value of b2 04 and on the output frequency at the moment the stop command is input If the output frequency was higher than 10 of the maximum output frequency E1 04 the DC injection time is lengthened like shown in the figure below DC injection brake time Run command OFF Y Output frequency En b2 04 x 10 Inverter output voltage interrupted DC injection brake DC injection brake time b2 04 Output frequency at stop command input Minimum baseblock NU time L2 03 1096 10096 maximum output frequency Fig 6 14 DC Injection Braking Stop EN Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 when an overcurrent OC occurs during stopping INFO ilCoast to Stop with Timer If the stop command is input i e the run command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 3 the Inverter output 18 switched off so that the motor coasts to stop After the stop command is input run commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed The time T depends on the output frequency when the stop command is input and on the deceleration time Operation wait time T Run command ON OFF ON
254. requency set in C6 02 as shown in Table 2 6 For details refer to Chapter 5 User Parameters Table 2 6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor Cable length More than 100m Carrier frequency 15 kHz max 10 kHz max i Ground Wiring Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line e Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Q and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Inverter Therefore if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal 1s too long potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable When using more than one Inverter be careful not to loop the ground wire O X OK NO a N Fig 2 6 Ground Wiring i Connecting a Braking Unit a Braking Resistor Unit LKEB Connect a Braking Unit and a Braking Resistor Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2 7 13 04 Stall prevention selection during deceleration 0 Disable stall prevention function Select either of them The Braking Resistor Unit will not work if L3 04 is set to 1 1 if stall prevention is
255. ription Range Setting 0 Overtorque undertorque detec tion disabled Overtorque detection only with speed agreement operation continues warning is output Overtorque detected continu ously during operation opera tion continues warning is output Overtorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection Overtorque detected continu ously during operation output stopped upon detection Undertorque detection only with speed agreement opera tion continues warning is out put Undertorque detected continu ously during operation opera tion continues warning is output Undertorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection Undertorque detected continu ously during operation output stopped upon detection Torque detection selection Torque detection Inverter rated current is set as level 100 Torque detection Sets the overtorque undertorque time detection time Hardware Protection L8 MEMO BUS Register Setting Factory Description Range Setting Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre Overheat pre alarm in C alarm level The pre alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat pre alarm occurs 0 Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast s
256. rter has to be replaced for any reason The following functions can also be used to manage user parameters Recording user parameters Setting access levels for user parameters Setting a password B Recording User Parameters 02 03 If 02 03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation the settings of user parameters will be saved in a separate memory area in the inverter When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason the user parameters can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1 03 Initialize to 1110 BUser Parameter Access Levels A1 01 A1 01 can be set to 0 monitoring only to prevent user parameters from being changed 1 01 can also be set to 1 User specified Parameters to display only parameters required by the machine or application in a pro gramming mode These parameters can be determined by setting the 2 00 parameters BPassword A1 04 and A1 05 When the access level is set to monitoring only A1 01 0 a password can be set so that user parameters will be displayed only when the correct password has been input Adjustment Suggestions a If hunting vibration or other problems originated by the control system occur during trial operation adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method This table lists the most com monly used user parameters only quency vo
257. rwriting of the data that are stored in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator When 03 02 is set to 0 and 03 01 is set to 1 to perform a write operation PrE will be displayed on the Digital Opera tor and the write operation will be stopped iaWriting Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter COPY To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter use the following method Digital Operator Display Explanation Press the MENU key and select advanced program ming mode DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Li Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the program e e ming mode RIFY Ut DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Select parameter 03 01 Copy Function Selection using the Increment key and Decrement key ee y DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the parameters e e setting display DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Change the set value to 2 using the Increment key DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the DATA ENTER key The COPY function will start DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE If the COPY function ends normally End is dis played on the Digital Operator Parameter 03 01 is automatically reset to 0 and then the display returns to 03 01 If an error is displayed set the parameters again Error displays and their meanings are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Opera
258. s for C6 02 are as follows 2 5 0 kHz 3 8 0 kHz 4 10 kHz 5 12 5 kHz and 6 15 kHz If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced Parameter Settings by Function Carrier Frequency Selection 6 2 Frequency Reference e 6 4 Hun Co WOO a aid e OO RE CRF aa HR C aaa dI 6 8 Methods a dae Deb ve rM REM AER PURO PEU UR CUR 6 10 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics 6 15 Adjusting Frequency 6 21 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function 6 24 Frequancy Detel ON o usce pt binh n pp 6 25 Improved Operating 6 27 Machine Protection 6 29 Automate Restart 6 37 IVE PG ON raie i 6 46 Input Terminal JUDICE IE n ocaeca ione dedenopat on aiio 6 50 Output Terminal Functions aureos toit aa tire ipsa rta dra atto aEkbShs 6 61 Monitor Parametefs nit 6 64 Funcions RTT 6 66 Digital Operator Functions 6 103 ee _ Carrier Frequency Selection Setting the Carrie
259. s4 s5 s6 S7 FM AC AM IG S Mop Main circuit terminals 2 Charge indicator Ground terminal Control circuit terminals Main circuit _ terminals KU Ground terminal Fig 2 4 Terminal Arrangement 200 V 400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more _ iring Main Circuit Terminals Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2 1 to Table 2 2 Refer to instruction manual TOE C726 2 for wire sizes for Braking Units and Braking Resistor Units Table 2 1 200 V Class Wire Sizes Inverter Termi Tightening Possible EA UR Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Si 2 Wire Type CIMR H Screws Nem mm AWG Away R LI S L2 T L3 41 42 BI B2 T m U T1 V T2 W T3 5 to E7Z20P4 M4 1 2 to 1 5 14 to 10 14 R LI S L2 T L3 41 42 BI B2 dea gu U TI V T2 W T3 5 to E7Z20P7 M4 1 2 to 1 5 14 to 10 14 R LI S L2 T L3 41 2 BI B2 T U TI V T2 W T3 5 to E7Z21P5 M4 1 2 to 1 5 14 to 10 14 R LI S L2 T L3 1 42 B1 B2 Te U TI V T2 W T3 to E7Z22P2 M4 1 2 to 1 5 14 to 10 14 S L2 T L3 1 42 B1 B2 4 T1 V T2 W T3 E7Z23P7 U Tl 4 1 2 to 1 5 12 to 10
260. se messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave You can set user defined test code and data values The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave no 1 Response Message Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H CRC 16 Higher ASH Higher ASH Lower 50H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Higher DAH Higher DAH CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH Writing to Multiple Inverter Memory Registers The writing of inverter memory registers works similar to the reading process i e the address of the first reg Ister that is to be written and the quantity of to be written registers must be set in the command message The to be written data must be consecutive starting from the specified address in the command message The data order must be higher 8 bits then lower 8 bits The data must be in memory register address order The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency reference of 60 0 Hz for the inverter with the slave address 01H
261. se run when ON stopped when OFF External fault input Fault when ON Fault reset Reset when ON Multi step speed reference i Master auxiliary switch Auxiliary frequency ref erence when ON Multi step speed reference 2 Multi step setting 2 when ON Jog frequency reference Jog frequency when ON Functions are selected by set ting H1 01 to H1 05 Signal Level 24 VDC 8 mA Photocoupler isolation Digital input common Digital Input Neutral Digital Input Power Supply 24VDC power supply for digital inputs 24 VDC 250 mA max E B E B on 5 E lt 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references 15 V Max current 20 mA Frequency reference 0 to 10 V 100 0 to 10 V 20 kQ Multi function analog input 4 to 20 mA 100 0 V to 10 V 100 0 to 20 mA 100 Function is selected by set ting H3 09 4 to 20 mA 250Q 0 V to 10 V 20kQ 0 to 20 mA 250Q Analog reference common Shield wire optional ground line connection point Digital output signals Running signal 1NO contact Operating when ON Zero speed Zero level b2 01 or below when ON Multi function contact outputs Fault output signal Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC Fault when OPEN across MB and MC Relay contacts Contact capacity 1 A max at 250 VAC 1 A max at 30 VDC An
262. set in L3 02 is exceeded Acceleration continues when current value falls below the level set in L3 02 Optimum adjustment Adjusts acceleration using the current level set in L3 02 as reference The acceleration time setting is ignored Stall prevention selection dur ing acceleration Set as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current to be 100 Normally it is not necessary to change this setting Lower the set value if the motor stalls using the factory setting Stall prevention level during acceleration ETime Chart The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3 01 is set to 1 Output current Stall level during L3 02 acceleration 85 of L 3 02 l Time Output frequency 1 i 2 1 The acceleration rate is lowered 2 The acceleration rate is stopped to reduce the output current 3 The acceleration is restarted Time Fig 6 19 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration i Setting Precautions If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or if the inverter is operated using the fac tory settings and the motor stalls lower the set value of L3 02 fusing the motor in the field weakening range L3 02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling It will be reduced to a fixed value of 50 of the inverte
263. shed within 5 seconds after the power was turned on The Digital Operator s connector isn t connected properly Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again The Inverter s control circuits are faulty Replace the Inverter CPU External RAM Fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuits were destroyed Replace the Inverter Digital Operator Communications Error 2 After communications were estab lished there was a communica tions error with the Digital Operator for more than 2 seconds The Digital Operator isn t connected properly Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again The Inverter s control circuits are faulty Replace the Inverter Baseblock circuit error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter EEPROM error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPU internal A D converter error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPU external A D converter error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter Option Card connection error The Option Card is not connected properly Turn off the power and insert the Card again The I
264. speed is calculated and acceleration deceleration is per formed from the calculated speed to the speci fied frequency motor direction is also searched Current Detection The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost or the maxi mum frequency and the speed is detected when the set search current level is reached Setting Range Factory Setting Speed search operating cur rent current detection Sets the speed search operation current as a per centage taking the Inverter rated current as 100 Usually not necessary to set When restarting is not possible with the factory settings reduce the value Speed search deceleration time current detection Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search Sets the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output fre quency Speed search wait time cur rent detection or speed calcu lation When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss the search operation is delayed for the time set here If e g a contactor is used at the output side of the inverter set this parameter to the contactor delay time or more Bi directional speed search selection Can be used to turn off the bidirectional capabili ties of the speed calculation form of speed search Then speed search will only be performed in the last known direction Min baseblock time
265. ss 0 4 to 22kW 120 96 90 E 400V Class 132kW 200V Class 30kW 400V Class 1 400V Class 30 to 55kW 5 t 2 5 o 5 g 2 6 i Carrier Freq 0 5kHz 8kHz 10kHz 15kHz Fig 6 2 Overload Capability depending on Carrier Frequency E Frequency Reference This section explains how to input the frequency reference Selecting the Frequency Reference Source Set parameter b1 01 to select the frequency reference source Related Parameters Param eter Description Setting Factory Number Range Setting Set the frequency reference source 0 Digital Operator b1 01 Reference selection 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 0to3 1 Q 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Binput the Frequency Reference from the Digital Operator When b1 01 is set to 0 you can input the frequency reference from the Digital Operator For details on setting the frequency reference refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes Fig 6 3 Frequency Setting Display Binputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage Analog Setting When b1 01 is setto 1 you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 voltage input or control circuit terminal A2 voltage or current input Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only If inputting the master speed frequency reference only input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal Al
266. ssed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning and error message will be e e o display and autotuning will be stopped DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Refer to page 7 10 Errors During Autotuning for details Autotuning completed END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 min utes indicating that autotuning has been completed DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Application Settings User parameters can be set as required in advanced programming mode i e the ADV indicator lights on the Digital Operator All the parameters that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode li Setting Examples The following are examples of settings for applications To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse set b1 04 to 1 to disable reverse operation or to 3 for output phase rotation and reverse disabled To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10 set E1 04 to 55 0 Hz To use a 0 to 10 V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz 0 to 90 speed deduction set H3 02 to 90 096 To limit the speed range between 20 and 80 set d2 01 to 80 096 and set d2 02 to 20 0 No load Operation This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no load state that means the machine is not con nected to the motor To avoid failures caused due to the
267. t the time to perform DC injection brak DC injection braking time at ingat stari start J 8 Used to stop coasting motor and restart it When the set value is 0 DC injection braking at start is not performed Used to set the time to perform DC injection brak ing at stop in units of 1 second Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is input When the set value is 0 00 DC injection braking at stop is not performed DC injection braking time at stop Motor Pre heat Function The motor pre heat function can be used to prevent e g moisture inside the motor due to condensation The pre heat current can be set in b2 09 Using a digital input which is set for motor pre heat 00 60 the function can be enabled or disabled Related Parameters s Setting Factory Access Vin zx Sets the DC current level when the motor pre heat Motor pre heat current function is enabled using a digital input UM E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set value Function 60 Motor pre heat command The time chart for motor pre heat 1s shown below Motor pre heat RUN Output frequency b2 09 b2 09 Output current Motor pre heat Motor pre heat Fig 6 16 Motor Pre heat Function Time Chart Using an Emergency Stop Set a multi function input terminal 1 to 15 or 17 emergency stop to decelerate to stop using the deceleration t
268. tails on the Digital Operator refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes iPerforming Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals When b1 02 is set to 1 you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals 6 Performing Operations Using a 2 wire Control The factory setting 15 set to a 2 wire control When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON forward operation will be performed and when S1 is turned OFF the Inverter will stop In the same way when control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON reverse operation will be performed and when S2 is turned OFF the Inverter will stop Forward Stop VETUS Reverse Stop SN Digital input neutral Fig 6 9 2 Wire Control Wiring Example with Positive Logic Performing Operations Using 3 Wire Control When any parameter from H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital input terminals S3 to S7 is set to 0 termi nals S1 and S2 are used for a 3 wire control and the multi function input terminal that has been set to 0 works as a forward reverse selection command terminal When the Inverter is initialized for 3 wire control with A1 03 multi function input 3 becomes the input termi nal for the forward reverse run command h Operation switch Stop switc NC contact NO contact Si O Run command operates when ON S2 Stop command stopped when ON S5 SS Forward reverse command multi function input SN Digital input neutral Fig 6 10 3 Wi
269. tal Operator Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less 1 17 Wiring This chapter describes wiring terminals main circuit terminal connections main circuit terminal wiring specifications control circuit terminals and control circuit wiring specifications Connections to Peripheral 2 2 Connection Dagiai Loi dieron epo idi pw peq d din do ER d 2 3 Terminal Block 2 5 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals 2 6 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals rere 2 19 Vaning CHOCK eC TCI HIER 2 26 Installing and Wiring Option nikon 2 27 E Magnetic con amp _ Connections to Peripheral Devices Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2 1 Power supply Molded case circuit breaker tactor MC AC reactor for power factor improvement DC reactor for power factor improvement ff Y Input noise filter I Inverter sd Ground Output noise filter Fig 2 1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices Y _ Connection Diagram The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2 2 When using the Digital Operator the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits DC reac
270. tallation Orientation and Space Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect When installing the Inverter always pro vide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation 120 mm min Horizontal Space Vertical Space 200V class inverter 0 55 to 90 kW 400V class inverter 0 55 to 132 kW 200V class inverter 110 kW 400V class inverter 160 to 220 kW 400V class inverter 300 kW Fig 1 10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space gt 1 The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis IP00 and Enclosed P a Wall mounted IP20 NEMA 1 Inverters m 2 Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18 5 kW or less in a panel Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 KW or more in a panel IMPORTANT Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals Removing the Terminal Cover B Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc tions of arrows 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2
271. te The PI Sleep Function is also available and can be used without enabled PI controller It can be used to let the inverter switch off its output aut when a minimum output frequency set in b5 15 has been output for a time longer than b5 16 Refer also to page page 6 91 PI Sleep Function omatically i Jump Frequencies Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 3 Description Set the center values of the jump frequencies in Hz This function is disabled when the jump frequency is set to 0 Hz Always ensure that the following applies d3 01 gt 43 02 gt 43 03 Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration the speed changes smoothly without jumping Setting Range Factory Setting MEMO BUS Register Jump frequency width Sets the jump frequency bandwidth in Hz The jump frequency range will be the jump frequency 43 04 iReference Frequency Hold d4 Param eter Number Frequency refer ence hold func tion selection Description Sets whether or not frequency ref erence value on hold will be recorded 0 Disabled when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again the frequency refer ence is set to 0 Enabled when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again the inverter starts at the previous hold frequency This function is available when the multi function inputs Accel Decel
272. ter Inverter Inverter Fig 6 44 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter 6 DOES E Communications Specifications The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table Item Specifications Interface RS 422 RS 485 Communications Cycle Asynchronous Start stop synchronization Communications Parameters Baud rate Select from 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 and 19 200 bps Data length 8 bits fixed Parity Select from even odd or none Stop bits 1 bit selected Communications Protocol MEMOBUS Number of Connectable Units 31 units max i Communications Connection Terminal The MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals S S and R Enable the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter seen from the PLC only S RS 422A or ou RE P 51 2222 Terminating 5 485 orr sistance R Dp 02222222 29 FOC 2 is Terminating resistance 1 2W 110 Ohms Fig 6 45 Communications Connection Terminal v 1 Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables P 2 Use shielded cables for the communications cables and use proper shield clamps 3 When using RS 485 communications connect S to and S to R on the Inverter exterior See pic IMPORTANT ture below iProcedure for Communicating with the PLC
273. ternal search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi function contact terminals an invalid multi function input selection operation error will occur Set either external search command 1 or external search command 2 If performing speed search using external search commands design the control circuit so that the run com mand and external search command are both ON These two commands must be kept on at least for the time set in parameter L2 03 If the Inverter output 1s equipped with a contactor set the contactor operation delay time in the Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 The factory setting is 0 2 s When not using a contactor you can reduce the search time to 0 0 s After waiting for the speed search wait time the Inverter starts the speed search Parameter b3 02 current detection level for search completion is effective only when current detection speed search is selected When the current falls below the detection level the speed search is supposed to be completed and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency If an overcurrent OC is detected when using speed search after power recovery lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 BApplication Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed Always perform non rotating autotuning for line to line resistance before using speed searches based on calculated speeds If the cable length between the motor and Inverter 15 changed after autotuning has b
274. the RUN key on the Digital Operator The Inverter will supply power to the non rotating motor for approximately 20 seconds and the line to line resistance and motor cable resistance will be automatically measured x e P Power will be supplied to the motor during autotuning but the motor will not turn Do not touch the e motor until autotuning has been completed IMPORTANT B Parameter Settings for Autotuning The following parameters must be set before autotuning Factory Set ting Display Setting Range 10 to 200 of Same as Set the output power of the motor in Kilowatts Inverter rated Inverter rated output output Motor out put power Same as gen 10 to 200 of eral purpose Set the rated current of the motor in Amps Inverter rated motor with current same capacity as Inverter Motor rated current 4 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning Digital Operator Display Description Motor rated power and current T1 02 and T1 04 The autotuning start display will appear when all set eooo tings through T1 04 have been completed The DENE PAE MERE ENE A TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit Autotuning started TUn10 Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Autotuning Stop command input If the STOP Key is pre
275. the Ambient Temperature essent tentent tette 1 11 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter 1 11 Installation Orientation and Space 1 12 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover 1 13 Removing the Terminal Cover esses esent tente tentent tete tette tente tentes 1 13 Attaching the Terminal COVBE 2 case ed ee teda Ria 1 13 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover 1 14 Inverters of 18 5 KW or Less tenentes 1 14 Inverters of 22 KW or More 1 17 ier dd cca alcool 2 1 Connections to Peripheral Devices 2 2 Connection DIAG TAN siot tte tut ei e sistat ape 2 3 Circuit Descriptions ccccccccecscssesessssesseseesssssessesessessesesesesseseeseseessseeeesssessestseseateeeanees 2 4 Terminal Block Configuration ttr to tete E Ag er OR 2 5 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals esseeeem 2 6 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors 2 6 Main Circuit Terminal Functions ssseeeet tenen 2 11 Main Circuit Configurations e reet ed etes ete diste 2 12 Standard Conne
276. the gap between two blocks 8 bit of a message exceeds 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid Application Precautions P Ifthe slave address specified in the command message is 0 all slaves execute the write function but do not return response messages to the master IMPORTANT BSelf Diagnosis The Inverter has a built in function for self diagnosing the functioning of the serial communication interface circuits This function is called the self diagnosis function It uses the connected communications parts of the send and receive terminals to receive data sent by the Inverter and thereby to check if communication is per formed normally To perform the self diagnosis function use the following procedure 1 Turn ON the inverter power supply and set 67 communications test mode in parameter H1 05 Terminal S7 Function Selection Turn OFF the inverter power supply Perform the wiring according to Fig 6 47 Turn ON the terminating resistance Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1 ESLILSEJES ET Fig 6 47 Communication Terminals Wiring for Self Diagnosis Bo XA Turn ON the inverter power supply During normal operation the Digital Operator displays PASS on the display If an error occurs a MEMOBUS communications error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Opera tor the error contact output will be turned ON and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF
277. time even during operation by changing the ON OFF status of this terminal The following table shows the acceleration deceleration time switching combinations Acceleration Deceleration Time 2 i Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Selection 1 Terminal OFF 1 01 1 02 1 03 1 04 5 Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration deceleration time automatically using the output fre quency When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1 11 the Inverter switches the acceleration deceleration time automatically as shown in the following diagram Set C1 11 to a value other than 0 0 Hz If C1 11 is set to 0 0 Hz the function will be disabled Output frequency Acceleration deceleration time Switching frequency C1 11 C1 03 C1 01 C1 02 C1 04 When output frequency gt C1 11 acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration deceleration Time 1 C1 01 C1 02 When output frequency C1 11 acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration deceleration Time 2 C1 03 C1 04 Fig 6 17 Acceleration deceleration Time Switching Frequency Entering S curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S curve pattern you can reduce shock when starting and stopping the machine Two S curve characteristic times can be set At ac
278. time in L1 02 The factory setting is 60 sec The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time L1 02 1 0 min operation at 50 Hz general purpose motor characteristics when L1 01 is set to 1 Operating time min Cold start Hot start Motor current 96 9 100 1580 20 E2 04is set to 100 Fig 6 25 Motor Protection Operation Time E Setting Precautions f multiple motors are connected to one inverter set parameter L1 01 to 0 disabled To protect each of the motors use a control circuit that switches off the inverter output when one of the motors overheats With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF there is a risk that the motor cannot be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 enabled because the thermal value will be reset after inverter power supply switch off For safe overload tripping set the value in parameter L1 02 to a low setting E Setting the Motor Overload Pre Alarm To enable the Motor overload pre alarm enable the motor overload protection function 1 e L1 01 must be set to 1 and set H2 01 or H2 02 multi function output terminals M1 M2 and M3 MA function selection to 1F motor overload OL pre alarm If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90 of the overload detec tion level the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON Motor Overheat Protection Using
279. tion RS 485 422 i i i i 1 i 1 i i i H o Analog input power supply t i i i i i i i i i 3 i Twisted pair H Shielded Wires iP shielded wires Fig 2 2 Connection Diagram Model CIMR E7Z47P5 Shown Above Circuit D escriptions Refer to the numbers indicated in Fig 2 2 SELV ail p IMPORTANT These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation These circuits may be interconnected with SELV or equivalent or non SELV circuits but not both Inverter supplied by four wire system source neutral grounded These circuits are SELV circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV or equivalent circuits Inverter supplied by three wire system source ungrounded or corner grounded These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective separation but only with basic insulation These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible unless they are is
280. tion Digital Input Settings H1 01 to H1 05 Terminal S3 to S7 PI Control Disable 19 When a multifunction input is set for this function it can be used to disable the PI function by switching the input to ON The PI target value becomes the frequency reference value PI Control Integral Reset 30 Using this function the integral share value of the PI control can be reset by setting a multifunction input to ON PI Control Integral Hold 31 Using this function the integral share value of the PI control can be hold by setting a multifunction input to ON The value will be hold as long as the input is ON PI Softstarter 34 Using this function the PI target value can be raised or lowered slowly using an accel decel ramp func tion The accel decel time can be set in parameter b5 17 The function is active when the multifunction input with this function is ON PI Input Characteristic Switch 35 Using this function the PI input characteristic can be inverted by setting a multifunction input to ON Energy saving To perform energy saving set b8 01 Energy Saving Mode Selection to 1 Related Parameters Param eter Details Number Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level Select whether to enable or disable energy saving control Energy saving mode selection 0 Disable Enable Sets the Energy saving coefficient 0 0 to Energy saving coefficient
281. tion ends normally End is dis played on the Digital Operator Parameter 03 01 is automatically reset to 0 and then the display returns to 03 01 If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Error displays and their meanings are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function Eiror Display Bue Verify error Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match BApplication Precautions Digital Operator Inverter product and type Software number Inverter capacity and voltage Qu When using the copy function check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the INFO Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator If you set A1 01 to 0 all parameters except A1 01 and A1 04 are write protected 71 00 02 00 and U3 will be displayed If A1 01 is set to 1 only the parameters A1 01 A1 04 and 2 00 can be read or written 71 00 02 00 and U3 O0 will be displayed All other parameters will not be displayed If you set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selec tion to 1B write parameters permitted you can write parameters from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON When the set terminal is OFF writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohibited You
282. tions for improving motor operating efficiency Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start and Low speed Operation The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load and increases the output torque The inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage and adjusts the output voltage V to compensate insuf ficient torque at startup and during low speed operation The compensation voltage is calculated as follows Motor primary voltage loss x parameter C4 01 Related Parameters Change Setting Factory during Access Range Setting Opera Level tion Param eter Description Number Sets the torque compensation gain using the multi Torque compensation gain plication factor Torque compensation delay Set the delay for the torque compensation function time constant in ms E Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain C4 01 Normally there is no need to change this setting Adjust the torque compensation gain under the following circumstances 6 fthe cable is very long increase the set value f the motor capacity 1s smaller than the Inverter capacity max applicable motor capacity increase the set value Ifthe motor is vibrating reduce the set value Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range E Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant C4 02 Set th
283. to set the parameter access level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and A1 04 1 Used to select user parameter Only parameters set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be read and set 2 Advanced Parameters can be read and set in both quick programming mode Q and advanced pro gramming A mode Parameter access level Used to initialize the parameters using the specified method 0 No initializing 1110 Initializes using the user parameters that have been stored before using 02 03 parameter Initializes using a two wire sequence Initializes to the factory setting 3330 Initializes using a three wire sequence Initialize Password input when a password has been set in A1 05 This function write protects parameters of the initialize mode If the password is changed A1 01 to A1 03 and A2 01 to A2 32 parameters can only be changed after inputting the right password Password Used to set a four digit number as the password Usually this parameter is not dis Password setting played When the password A1 04 is displayed hold down the RESET key and press the Menu key and A1 05 will be displayed BUser set Parameters A2 The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table Param eter Number User specified parameters Description Used to select the function for each of the user specified parameters User pa
284. top Error reset Multi step command 1 Multi step command 2 Jog frequency External fault SN Digital input neutral Fig 6 7 Control Circuit Terminal During 5 step Operation Frequency reference 4 Frequency Frequency reference reference 3 Frequency reference 2 Frequency reference 1 Jog frequency Forward stop ON OFF Multi step speed command 1 OFF b Multi step speed command 2 OFF ON Jog frequency selection OFF ON Fig 6 8 Multi step speed command Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart Note The multifunction input setting Jog Frequency 2 69 can be used for jog frequency selection when a 3 wire control is used for the control circuit If it is selected while the inverter is initialized to 2 wire con trol an OPEO3 error will be displayed _ E Run Command This section explains input methods for the run command Selecting the Run Command Source Set parameter b1 02 to select the source for the run command Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Range Setting Set the run command source 0 Digital operator 1 Control circuit terminal digital multifunction inputs 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Operation method selection iBPerforming Operations Using a Digital Operator When b1 02 is set to 0 you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys RUN STOP and FWD REV For de
285. top in fast stop time C1 09 3 Continue operation Monitor display only 4 OH Alarm and output fre quency reduction L8 19 A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a alarm will be given in set ting 3 and 4 Operation selec tion after over heat pre alarm Input Phase Loss Allowed DC bus ripple before Detection Level Input Phase Loss is detected 0 Disabled Ground fault pro 1 Enabled tection selection It is not recommended to use another setting than factory setting Sets the ON OFF control for the cooling fan Cooling Fan con 0 ON only when RUN command trol selection is on 1 ON whenever inverter is pow ered up Set the time in seconds to delay Cooling fan con turning OFF the cooling fan after trol delay time the inverter STOP command is given Ambient temper Set the ambient temperature ature 0 OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled 1 OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled It is not recommended to use another setting than factory setting 0 Disable gain 0 Soft CLA selec 1 Enable tion It is not recommended to use another setting than factory setting OL2 characteris tics selection at low speeds Sets the frequency reference when OH pre alarm is detected in per cent of maximum frequency 1 04 Frequency refer ence during OH pre alarm The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity T
286. tor Copy Function Error Display Meaning Inverter product code or Inverter software number are different Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital Operator are different Comparison between the parameter written to the Inverter and the parameter in the Digital Operator are different After copying has ended comparison between the checksum value of the Inverter parameter area and the check sum value of the Digital Operator parameter area are different i Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values VERIFY To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values use the following method Digital Operator Display Explanation Press the MENU key and select advanced program ming mode DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the parameters monitor display DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Select parameter 03 01 Copy Function Selection eo using the Increment key and Decrement key DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the function set eo ting display DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Change the set value to 3 using the Increment key eo DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Press the DATA ENTER key The VERIFY function will start e DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Ifthe VERIFY func
287. tor to improve input power factor optional X 3 2 i contactor Fuse H Varispeed E7 3 phase power L1 RILI suppl Lett it 300480 V 12 Eine tty S2 CIMR 50 60 Hz 13 1 Filter e i6 Ts E7Z47P5 90 Forward Run Stop Reverse Run Stop External fault Fault reset Multi step speed setting 1 Multi step speed setting 2 209 frequency selection Fault contact output 250 VAC 1 A max 30 VDC 1 A max Contact output 1 Multi functi ulti function Default During run digital inputs Factory settings Contact output 2 output Default Zero speed Shield terminal y Analog input power supply gt 15 V 20 mA Default Frequency Bias 3 0 to 10V 2kQ 1 Analog input 1 Master Adjustment 2kQ frequency reference x 20k 0 to 10 V 20kQ 1 1 0 to 10 V 2 mA 4 to 20mA 4 to 20 250 2 v gt Multi function digital 250 VAC 1 30 1 A max Multi function analog output 1 Default Output frequency 0 to 10 V 2 Ja Multi function analog input 1 D V ov 15 V 20 mA Multi function analog output 2 0 to 10 V 2 mA Default Output power 0 to 10 V Terminating resistance MEMOBUS communica
288. tory Setting MEMO BUS Register Stall prevention level during accel Effective when L3 01 is set to 1 or 2 Set as a percentage of Inverter rated current Usually changing this setting is not necessary Reduce the setting when the motor stalls Stall prevention selection during decel 0 Disabled Deceleration as set If deceleration time is too short a DC Bus overvoltage may result Enabled Deceleration is stopped when the DC Bus volt age exceeds the stall prevention level Deceleration restarts when the voltage falls below the stall prevention level again Intelligent deceleration mode Deceleration rate is automati cally adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time The set decelera tion time is disregarded When a braking option Braking Resistor Unit Braking Unit is used always set to 0 Stall prevention selection during running 0 Disabled Runs as set With a heavy load the motor may stall 1 Deceleration using deceleration time 1 C1 02 2 Deceleration using decelera tiontime 2 C1 04 Stall prevention level during run ning Effective when L3 05 is 1 or 2 Set as a percentage of the Inverter rated current Usually changing this setting is not necessary Reduce the setting when the motor stalls Speed agreement detection level m Reference Detection L4 Description Effective when fout
289. turation at 60 Hz 180 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz The high start up torque is provided by the fully automatic torque boost function so normally there is no need to use this pattern 6 When you select these patterns the values of parameters E1 04 to E1 10 are changed automatically There are three types of values for E1 04 to E1 10 depending on the Inverter capacity 0 4 to 1 5 kW V f pattern 2 2 to 45 kW V f pattern 55 to 300 kW V f pattern The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages 6 97 0 4 to 1 5 kW V f Pattern The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Constant Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 0 Set Value 1 Set Value 2 Set Value 3 1 3 2 5 50 Hz 5 60 72 Hz Set Value 5 Set Value 7 13 25 50 Hz 60 Hz Set Value 9 Set Value A Set Value B V 0 1 32 5 50 Hz 1 32 5 50 Hz 60 Hz Set Value E 60 90 Hz 60 120 Hz 60 180 Hz 6 98 2 2 to 45 kW V f Pattern The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Constant Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 0 1 3 2 5 50 Hz Variable Torque Chara Set Value 4 V M 0 1 32 5 50 Hz Fixed Output Operatio Set Value
290. uency gt L4 01 or output frequency lt L4 01 with detection width L4 02 used 5 27 Setting Value Function Inverter operation ready READY After initialization or no faults During DC bus undervoltage UV detection During baseblock NO contact ON during baseblock Frequency reference source selection ON Frequency reference from Operator Run command source selection status ON Run command from Operator Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NO NO contact ON Overtorque undertorque detection Loss of frequency reference Effective when 1 is set for L4 05 Fault ON Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and CPFO01 has occurred Not used Set when the terminal is not used Minor fault ON Alarm displayed Fault reset command active Timer function output Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NC NC Contact OFF Torque detection Reverse direction Restart enabled ON Restart enabled Motor overload OL1 including OH3 pre alarm ON 90 or more of the detection level OH pre alarm temperature reached L8 02 Drive enabled Drive waiting start delay time b1 11 is active During OH and reduced Frequency RUN command from option card communications E Analog Inputs MEMO BUS Register Setting Factory Description Range Setting Sets the frequency as a percent age of the maximum
291. ufficient at low speeds Minimum output fre e Controlling shock at ol SK 3 05 Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters The following user parameters will also affect the control system indirectly Name Parameter Number Application Acceleration deceleration times C1 01 to C1 11 Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration S curve characteristics C2 01 and C2 02 Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration Jump frequencies d3 01 to d3 04 Used to avoid resonance points during acceleration or deceleration Analog input filter time constant H3 12 Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise Stall prevention L3 01 to L3 06 Used to prevent OV overvoltage errors and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration deceleration Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting normally has not to be changed When using an optional braking resistor unit and braking unit however disable stall pre vention during deceleration by setting L3 04 to 0 User Parameters This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter User Parameter 5 2 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels 5 3 User
292. ugh time 12 03 Min baseblock BB s 01 02 04 05 06 06 07 08 09 time L2 04 Voltage recovery time 5 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 Parame ter Num ber Name Factory Setting Inverter Capacity 45 55 02 04 kVA selection Energy saving coefficient 2E 2F Carrier frequency selection Motor rated current Motor no load current Motor line to line resist ance Momentary power loss ride through time Min baseblock BB time Voltage recovery time Overheat pre alarm level Factory Setting ber Inverter Capacity 185 220 02 04 kVA selection 35 36 Energy saving coeffi cient Carrier frequency selec Motor rated current Motor no load current Motor line to line resist ance Momentary power loss ride through time Min baseblock BB time Voltage recovery time Overheat pre alarm level Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V class Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 11 kW If C6 02 is set to 0 1 or F and the initial value of C6 03 and C6 04 is 2 0 kHz the initial setting
293. uit board must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power Never connect general LC RC interference suppression filters capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the inverter input or output To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults etc being displayed the signaling contacts of any contac tor or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic e g baseblock This is absolutely imperative This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter safety pre cautions and instructions for use must be followed The inverter may must be operated with the appropriate line filters following the installation instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered Only then will adequate protection be provided Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts The operating company 15 responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual VII Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use E General Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this inverter Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation Removal of housing compon
294. ults the operator display will show the following The fi f itor is dis Display opertion e frequency reference monitor is dis played in the data display section DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE When a fault has occurred the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display In that case refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation The display will differ depending on the Display for fault operation type of fault A low voltage alarm is shown at left Basic Settings Switch to the quick programming mode the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operator should light and then 4 set the following user parameters e Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures Find a list of the Quick Programming Parameters on page 5 4 User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode and details of the parameters in Chapter 6 Parameter Settings by Function Table 4 1 Basic Parameter Settings Must be set O Set as required Setting Range Parameter Description Sets the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Reference selec tion Sets the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal digital input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Optio
295. undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON 17 Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NC NC contact Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF 6 01 Set Value and Operator Display The relationship between alarms displayed on the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected and the setting in L6 01 is shown in the following table Operator Function Overtorque Under torque Detection 1 Overtorque undertorque detection disabled Overtorque detection only with speed agree operation continues warning is output OL3 flashes Overtorque detected continuously during operation operation continues warning is output OL3 flashes Overtorque detection only with speed agree output is stopped upon detection OL3 lights up Overtorque detected continuously during operation output is stopped upon detection OL3 lights up Undertorque detection only with speed agree operation continues warning is output UL3 flashes Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues warning is output UL3 flashes Undertorque detection only with speed matching output is stopped upon detection UL3 lights up Undertorque detected continuously during operation output is stopped upon detec tion UL3 lights up li Setting Example The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection Overtorque
296. unications error Set the stopping method for communica tions errors 0 Deceleration to stop using the deceler ation time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Gain terminal Al Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maximum output frequency when 10 V is input Bias terminal Al Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maximum frequency when 0 V is input Gain terminal A2 Sets the input level when terminal A2 input is 10 V 20 mA according to the 100 value of the function set in parame ter H3 09 100 0 Bias terminal A2 Sets the input level when terminal A2 is 0 V 4 mA 0 mA according to the 100 value of the function set in parameter H3 09 Momentary power loss detection 0 Disabled DC bus undervoltage UV 1 detection 1 Enabled Restarted when the power returns within the time set in L2 02 When L2 02 is exceeded DC bus undervoltage is detected 2 Enabled while CPU is operating Restarts when power returns during control operations Does not detect DC bus undervoltage Momentary power loss ride through time Ride through time when Momentary Power Loss Selection L2 01 is set to 1 in units of seconds ter ber Operation when frequency refer ence is missing Description 0 Stop Operation follows the frequency reference 1 O
297. upply are loose The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large A fault occurred in the inrush cur rent prevention circuit Corrective Actions Reset the fault after correcting its cause Control Power Fault The control power supply voltage dropped Try turning the power supply off and on Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur Inrush Current Prevention Cir cuit Fault Overheating occurred in the inrush resistor The MC did not respond for 10 s after the MC ON signal has been output The MC in the main circuit failed The MC excitation coil is burned out Try turning the power supply off and on Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur Main Circuit Voltage Fault The main circuit DC bus voltage oscillates unusually not when regenerating An open phase occurred in the input power supply A momentary power loss occurred The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too high The voltage balance between the phases is bad Reset the fault after correcting its cause oH aH Cooling Fin Overheating The temperature of the Inverter s cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8 02 or 105 C OH The temperature exceeded the setting in L8 02 Stopping method can be changed by L8 03 1 The temperature exceeded 105 C Stopping method Coast to stop The am
298. ut Open Chassis Enclosed Wall mounted Capacity KW Capacity Basic Model Number IEC IPOO IEC IP20 NEMA 1 kVA CIMR E7ZLIEILIEIEIEI CIMR E7ZOOO0000 CIMR E7Z20P4 20P410 CIMR E7Z20P7 20P710 CIMR E7Z21P5 21P510 CIMR E7Z22P2 22P210 CIMR E7Z23P7 Remove the top and bottom cov 23P710 ers from the Enclosed Wall CIMR E7Z25P5 mounted model 25P510 CIMR E7Z27P5 27P510 CIMR E7Z2011 201110 CIMR E7Z2015 201510 CIMR E7Z2018 201810 CIMR E7Z2022 202200 202210 CIMR E7Z2030 203000 203010 CIMR E7Z2037 203700 203710 772045 204500 204510 CIMR E7Z2055 205500 205510 772075 207500 207510 772090 209000 CIMR E7Z2110 211000 Varispeed E7 Voltage Class 200 V class Table 1 1 Varispeed E7 Models Specifications Maximum Always specify through the protective structure when ordering Motor Output Open Chassis Enclosed Wall mounted Capacity kW Capacity Basic Model Number IEC IPOO IEC IP20 NEMA 1 kVA CIMR E7ZOO0000 CIMR E7ZOO0000 CIMR E7Z40P4 40P410 CIMR E7Z40P7 40P710 CIMR E7Z41P5 41P510 CIMR E7Z42P2 42P210 CIMR E7Z43P7 Remove the top and bottom cov BPU CIMR E7Z44P0 ers from the Enclosed Wall 44P010 CIMR E7Z45P5 45P510 CIMR E7Z47P5 47 510 774011 40110 CIMR E7Z4015 401510 CIMR E7Z4018 401810 CIMR E7Z4022 402200 402210 CIMR E7Z4030 403000 4030 CIMR E7Z4037 403700 40
299. ut current A ground fault occurred at the Inverter output A ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage worn insula tion or a damaged cable Reset the fault after correcting its cause Fuse Blown The fuse in the main circuit is blown One of the output IGBT s has failed because of a short circuit or ground fault at the Inverter output Check the motor and cables for short circuits or insulation fail ures Replace the Inverter after cor recting the cause Main Circuit Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level 200 V class Approx 410 V 400 V class Approx 820 V The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large Increase the deceleration time or connect a braking option The power supply voltage is too high Decrease the voltage so that it is within the inverters specifications Display Meaning Main Circuit Undervoltage The main circuit DC voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level L2 05 200 V class Approx 190 V 400 V class Approx 380 V Main Circuit MC Operation Fail ure The MC stopped responding dur ing Inverter operation Applica ble Inverter Capacities 200 V class 37 to 110 kW 400 V class 75 to 300 kW Probable Causes An open phase error occurred at the input power supply A momentary power loss occurred The wiring terminals for the input power s
300. ut current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3 06 for 100 ms or longer the motor speed is reduced Set whether to enable or disable the stall prevention using parameter L3 05 Set the according deceleration times using C1 02 Deceleration time 1 or C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3 06 2 the motor will accelerate again to the set fre quency m Related Parameters Param eter Description Number Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level 0 Disabled Operates according to the setting Motor may stall when the load is too large Stall prevention selection dur 1 Enabled Deceleration time 1 Deceleration ing running function selection time set in C1 02 is used 2 Enabled Deceleration time 2 Deceleration time set in C1 04 is used Enabled when L3 05 is set to 1 or 2 Set as a per centage taking Inverter rated current to be 100 Normally there is no need to change this setting Lower the set value if the motor stalls at the factory setting Stall prevention level during running Detecting Motor Torque If an excessive load is applied to the machinery overtorque or the load suddenly drops undertorque you can output an alarm signal to one of the multi function output terminal M1 M2 or M3 M4 To use the overtorque undertorque detection function set B or 17 overtorque undertorque detection NO NC in one
301. values Used to move to the previous item or data Pressed to enter menu items user parameters and set values DATA ENTER KEY Also used to switch from one screen to another Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by BUN Key the Digital Operator Stops Inverter operation STOP Key This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting user parameter 02 02 Note Except in diagrams Keys are referred to the Key names listed in the above table There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status The RUN key indicator will flash and the STOP key indicator will light during initial excitation or DC brake The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in Fig 3 33 Inverter output frequency 7 NS STOP RUN STOP Frequency setting RUN e e STOP e Light up Blinking e Not light up Fig 3 2 RUN and STOP Indicators _ Modes This section describes the Inverter s modes and switching between modes Inverter Modes The Inverter s user parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user parameters The Inverter is equippe
302. verse run prohibited is selected If b1 04 Prohibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 or 3 reverse run prohibited the Inverter will not accept reverse run commands To use both forward and reverse operation set b1 04 to 0 or 2 If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor operates in the wrong direction the motor output wiring is faulty When the Inverter T1 U T2 V and T3 W are properly connected to the motor T1 U T2 V and T3 W the motor operates in a for ward direction when a forward run command is executed The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type so be sure to check the specifications The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U V and W or use parameter b1 04 to reverse output direction If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow T The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration is too low the acceleration time will be very long Check to be sure that the set value is suitable EThe stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06 Stall Prevention Level during Running is too low the speed may drop already at low output torque Check to be sure that the set value is suitable If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference BThe analog frequency reference bias or g
303. wer digits kWh display Cannot be output LED Test For testing LEDs on operator If this monitor is selected all LED s light up only on LED operator Cannot be output OPE fault param eter Shows the first parameter number when an OPE fault is detected Cannot be output PI input volume PI input volume 10 V 100 PI input 0 to 10 V possible PI output volume PI control output 10 V 100 PI output 0 to 10 V possible eter Number PI setpoint Description PI setpoint Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output 10 V 100 PI setpoint MEMO BUS Register MEMOBUS communications error code Shows MEMOBUS errors 01 39 tii 7 CRC error 1 Data length error Not used always 0 1 Parity error 1 Overrun error 1 Framing error 1 Timeout Not used always 0 Cannot be output Cooling fan oper ating time Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan The time can be set in 02 10 Cannot be output Frequency refer ence at AUTO operation Monitors the value of the fre quency reference when AUTO operation is active 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible Frequency refer ence at HAND operation Monitors the value of the fre quency reference when HAND operation is active 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible PI feedback
304. wiring of the control circuit it s recommended to use the LOCAL mode Press the LOCAL REMOTE key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital Operator Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter For applica tions at which the machine can be driven in one direction only check the motor rotation direction Operation with Jog frequency reference d1 17 default 6 00 Hz can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the JOG key on the Digital Operator If the external control circuit prevents operation from the Dig ital Operator confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning and then start operation in REMOTE mode 1 with a signal from the control signal terminal Both a RUN command forward or reverse and a frequency reference or multi step speed com INFO mand must be provided to start Inverter operation Loaded Operation ilConnecting the Load After confirming that the motor has stopped completely connect the mechanical system Be sure to tighten all the screws when connecting the motor shaft to the mechanical system B Operation using the Digital Operator Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no load operation
305. y gt 14 01 Bit 6 Inverter startup completed Startup completed 002CH Bit 7 Undervoltage detection 1 Detected Bit 8 Baseblock 1 Inverter output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1 Not communication 0 Communication option Bit A Run command mode 1 Not communication 0 Communication option Bit B Overtorque detection 1 Detected Bit C Frequency reference lost 1 Lost Bit D Restart enabled 1 Restarting Bit E Error including MEMOBUS communications time out 1 Error occurred Bit F MEMOBUS communications time out 1 Timed out Multi function contact output status Bit 0 Multi function contact output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF 002DH Bit 1 Multi function contact output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit2 Not used Bits 3 to F Not used 002EH 0030H Not used 0031H Main circuit DC voltage 0032H 0037H Not used 0038H PI feedback max output frequency 2 10096 resolution 0 1 without sign 6 0039H PI input max output frequency 100 resolution 0 1 with sign 003AH PI output max output frequency 100 resolution 0 1 with sign 003BH CPU software number 003CH Flash software number Communications error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used 003DH Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used 003EH kVA setting Note Communications error details
306. ypes of installation This manual therefore has to be limited to general guidelines electrical equipment produces radio and line borne interference at various frequencies The cables pass this on to the environment like an aerial Connecting an item of electrical equipment e g drive to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF or LF interference to get into the mains The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components proper grounding and shielding of cables A large contact area is necessary for low impedance grounding of HF interference The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable Moreover cable shields must be connected with purpose made ground clips iLaying Cables Measures Against Line Borne Interference Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate Mount the two components as close to each other as possible with cables kept as short as possible Use a power cable with well grounded shield Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal e g metal plate Shielded Cable Use a cable with braided shield Ground the maximum possible area of the shield It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips see following figure _

VARISPEED E7 USER'S MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents